Emerson NetSure 802 DC Power System Application Guide

Add to my manuals
188 Pages

advertisement

Emerson NetSure 802 DC Power System Application Guide | Manualzz

NetSure

-48V DC Power System

User Instructions

Section 5877 (Issue AQ, January 15, 2013)

SPEC. NO. MODEL

582140000

802 NLDB

802 NLEB

802 NL B

Business-Critical Continuity ™, Emerson Network Power, and the Emerson Network

Power logo are trademarks and service marks of Emerson Electric Co.

Lorain

®

and Vortex

®

are registered trademarks of Emerson

Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc.

NetSure ™, NetSpan™, NetReach™, NetXtend™, and NetPerform™ are trademarks of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

The products covered by this instruction manual are manufactured and/or sold by Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc.

The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice and may not be suitable for all applications. While every precaution has been taken to ensure the accuracy and completeness of this document, Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. assumes no responsibility and disclaims all liability for damages resulting from use of this information or for any errors or omissions. Refer to other local practices or building codes as applicable for the correct methods, tools, and materials to be used in performing procedures not specifically described in this document.

This document is the property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Copyright

©

2013, Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc.

All rights reserved throughout the world.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

STATIC WARNING

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

The printed circuit cards used in this equipment contain static sensitive components. The warnings listed below must be observed to prevent damage to these components. Disregarding any of these warnings may result in personal injury or damage to the equipment.

1. Strictly adhere to the procedures provided in this document.

2. Before touching any static sensitive component or printed circuit card containing such a component, discharge all static electricity from yourself by wearing a wrist strap grounded through a one megohm resistor. Some wrist straps, such as Emerson Network Power Part Number 631810600, have a built-in one megohm resistor; no external resistor is necessary. Read and follow wrist strap manufacturer’s instructions outlining use of a specific wrist strap.

3. Do not touch the traces or components on a printed circuit card containing static sensitive components.

Handle the printed circuit card only by the edges that do not have connector pads.

4. After removing a printed circuit card containing a static sensitive component, place the printed circuit card only on conductive or anti-static material such as conductive foam, conductive plastic, or aluminum foil.

Do not use ordinary Styrofoam or ordinary plastic.

5. Store and ship static sensitive devices or printed circuit cards containing such components only in static shielding containers.

6. If necessary to repair a printed circuit card containing a static sensitive component, wear an appropriately grounded wrist strap, work on a conductive surface, use a grounded soldering iron, and use grounded test equipment.

Static Warning Page 1 of 2

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Page 2 of 2 Static Warning

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

FCC INFORMATION

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

The MCA Interface Modem Option (if installed) has been granted a registration number by the Federal

Communications Commission, under Part 68 rules and regulations for direct connection to the telephone lines. In order to comply with these FCC rules, the following instructions must be carefully read and applicable portions followed completely: a) Direct connection to the telephone lines may be made only through the standard plug- ended cord furnished to the utility-installed jack. No connection may be made to party or coin phone lines. Prior to connecting the device to the telephone lines, you must: b) Call your telephone company and inform them you have an FCC registered device you desire to connect to their telephone lines. Give them the number(s) of the line(s) to be used, the make and model of the device, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence. This information will be found on the device or enclosed with instructions as well as the jack suitable for your device. c) After the telephone company has been advised of the above you may connect your device if the jack is available, or after the telephone company has made the installation. d) Repairs may be made only by the manufacturer or his authorized service agency. Unauthorized repairs void registration and warranty. Contact seller or manufacturer for details of permissible user performed routine repairs, and where and how to have other than routine repairs. e) If, through abnormal circumstances, harm to the telephone lines is caused, it should be unplugged until it can be determined if your device or the telephone line is the source. If your device is the source, it should not be reconnected until necessary repairs are effected. f) Should the telephone company notify you that your device is causing harm, the device should be unplugged. The telephone company will, where practicable, notify you, that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. However, where prior notice is not practicable, the telephone company may temporarily discontinue service, if such action is reasonably necessary, in such cases the telephone company must (A) Promptly notify you of such temporary discontinuance, (B) Afford you the opportunity to correct the condition and (C) Inform you of your rights to bring a complaint to the FCC under their rules. g) The telephone company may make changes in its communications facilities, equipment, operations or procedures, where such action is reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with FCC rules. If such changes can be reasonably expected to render any customer’s devices incompatible with telephone company facilities, or require modification or alteration, or otherwise materially affect its performance, written notification must be given to the user, to allow uninterrupted service.

The following information is provided here and on a label attached to the outside of the MCA Interface Modem

Option (if installed).

JACK

RJ-11

RINGER EQUIVALENCE FCC REGISTRATION NUMBER

0.2A B46USA-22429-MM-E

FCC Information Page 1 of 2

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Page 2 of 2 FCC Information

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

CONTENTS PAGE

CHAPTER 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW ....................................................................................... 1-1

Preface ............................................................................................................................................................. 1-2

System Description .......................................................................................................................................... 1-3

System Overview Illustrations .......................................................................................................................... 1-6

Power/Distribution Bay .............................................................................................................................. 1-6

Power Only Bay ......................................................................................................................................... 1-7

Distribution Only Bay ................................................................................................................................. 1-8

Detail A - Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Card .................................................................................... 1-9

Detail B - System Monitoring and Control Section .................................................................................. 1-10

Detail C - Monitoring and Control Section (Distribution Only Bays) ........................................................ 1-11

Detail D - Front Door (Primary Power/Distribution and Power Only Bays) MCA Control Panel and

Display ..................................................................................................................................................... 1-12

Detail E - MCA Circuit Card (Primary Power/Distribution and Power Only Bays) and Router Circuit

Card (Secondary Power/Distribution and Power Only Bays and Distribution Only Bays) ...................... 1-13

Detail F .................................................................................................................................................... 1-14

Details G - MCA I/O Circuit Cards ........................................................................................................... 1-15

Detail H - LMS I/O Circuit Cards .............................................................................................................. 1-16

Detail J - Rectifier .................................................................................................................................... 1-24

CHAPTER 2 NAVIGATING THE MCA................................................................................... 2-1

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURES ........................................................... 3-1

LMS Operating Procedures.............................................................................................................................. 3-2

LMS Local Port ................................................................................................................................................. 3-2

Installing the USB Device Driver from the Furnished CD .......................................................................... 3-2

Downloading the USB Driver from the Web .............................................................................................. 3-3

Setting up your Computer to Access the Power System........................................................................... 3-3

Local Controls and Indicators........................................................................................................................... 3-3

Location and Identification ......................................................................................................................... 3-3

LMS Main/Expansion CPU Circuit Card (if furnished) Controls and Indicators ........................................ 3-3

Bay LED Indicator ...................................................................................................................................... 3-4

Distribution Bus LED Indicator ................................................................................................................... 3-4

MCA Component LED Indicator ................................................................................................................ 3-4

Bay Monitoring and Control Section Indicators ......................................................................................... 3-4

MCA Controls and Indicators ..................................................................................................................... 3-5

MCA Display .............................................................................................................................................. 3-6

Surge Suppression Alarms (available only if a Surge Suppression Option is furnished) .......................... 3-6

Rectifier Controls and Indicators ............................................................................................................... 3-7

208V and 480V Input Rectifiers .......................................................................................................... 3-7

External Alarms ................................................................................................................................................ 3-8

Starting and Stopping System Operation ......................................................................................................... 3-8

Rectifier Normal Starting Procedure .......................................................................................................... 3-8

Rectifier Stopping Procedure (Local)......................................................................................................... 3-8

Table of Contents Page i

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Complete Shutdown ............................................................................................................................ 3-8

Local TR Shutdown ............................................................................................................................. 3-8

Rectifier Stopping Procedure (Remote) (if optional LMS installed) ........................................................... 3-8

Restarting Procedures when Rectifier is Automatically or Manually Inhibited, Shut Down, or Locked

Out .................................................................................................................................................................... 3-9

Rectifier High Voltage Shutdown Lockout ................................................................................................. 3-9

Rectifier Emergency Shutdown and Fire Alarm Disconnect ..................................................................... 3-9

Remote On/Off (TR) .................................................................................................................................. 3-9

Output Voltage Mode of Operation Selection .................................................................................................. 3-9

Placing the System into the Float Mode of Operation ............................................................................... 3-9

Placing the System into the Test/Equalize Mode of Operation ............................................................... 3-10

Method 1 (Manual Test/Equalize) Procedure ................................................................................... 3-10

Method 2 (Manually Initiated Timed Test/Equalize) Procedure ........................................................ 3-12

Method 3 (Automatic Test/Equalize) Procedure ............................................................................... 3-14

Method 4 (External Test/Equalize) Procedure .................................................................................. 3-16

Setting MCA Audible Alarm Cutoff Reset Time Period .................................................................................. 3-17

Procedure .......................................................................................................................................... 3-17

Setting Rectifier Sequencing Delay Time Period ........................................................................................... 3-18

Procedure .......................................................................................................................................... 3-18

Setting MCA Custom Text Messages (Names) ............................................................................................. 3-19

Procedure .......................................................................................................................................... 3-19

Mapping LMS LED Channels to the MCA Display and MCA Customer Alarm Relays ................................. 3-20

Procedure .......................................................................................................................................... 3-20

Using the Alarm Relay Test Feature .............................................................................................................. 3-20

MCA “Power Share” Feature.......................................................................................................................... 3-21

Description ............................................................................................................................................... 3-21

Operating Modes ..................................................................................................................................... 3-21

Low Load Operation .......................................................................................................................... 3-21

Normal Load Operation ..................................................................................................................... 3-21

High Load Operation ......................................................................................................................... 3-21

Overload Operation ........................................................................................................................... 3-21

Requirements and Conditions ................................................................................................................. 3-21

Programming the MCA Power Share Feature in the New Power System .............................................. 3-22

Enabling Power Share ...................................................................................................................... 3-22

Setting the Power Share Initial Capacity Limit .................................................................................. 3-22

Setting the Power Share Voltage Offset ........................................................................................... 3-23

Verifying the Operation of the Power Share Feature .............................................................................. 3-23

MCA “ALTERNATE CURRENT LIMIT” FEATURE ........................................................................................ 3-25

Description ............................................................................................................................................... 3-25

Operating Modes ..................................................................................................................................... 3-25

Normal Current Limit Operation ........................................................................................................ 3-25

Alternate Current Limit Operation ..................................................................................................... 3-25

Requirements and Conditions ................................................................................................................. 3-25

Programming the MCA Alternate Current Limit Feature ......................................................................... 3-25

Enabling Alternate Current Limit ....................................................................................................... 3-25

Page ii Table of Contents

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Setting the Alternate Current Limit Initial Capacity Limit ................................................................... 3-26

CHAPTER 4 MCA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ....................................................................... 4-1

Adjustment Location and Identification ............................................................................................................ 4-2

Adjusting Float Output Voltage ........................................................................................................................ 4-3

Adjusting Test/Equalize Output Voltage .......................................................................................................... 4-4

Adjusting High Voltage Shutdown .................................................................................................................... 4-5

Adjusting Rectifier Current Limit ...................................................................................................................... 4-6

Adjusting System High Voltage Alarm 1 .......................................................................................................... 4-7

Adjusting System High Voltage Alarm 2 .......................................................................................................... 4-8

Adjusting System Battery On Discharge Alarm ............................................................................................... 4-9

Adjusting System Very Low Voltage Alarm .................................................................................................... 4-10

Adjusting Total Distribution Load Alarm ......................................................................................................... 4-11

Adjusting Distribution Group A Load Alarm ................................................................................................... 4-12

Adjusting Distribution Group B Load Alarm ................................................................................................... 4-13

Adjusting Battery Ambient High Temperature #1 Alarm (if Battery Charge Digital Temperature

Compensation Probe is installed) .................................................................................................................. 4-14

Adjusting Battery Ambient High Temperature #2 Alarm (if Battery Charge Digital Temperature

Compensation Probe is installed) .................................................................................................................. 4-15

Adjusting Battery Ambient Low Temperature #1 Alarm (if Battery Charge Digital Temperature

Compensation Probe is installed) .................................................................................................................. 4-16

Adjusting Battery Ambient Low Temperature #2 Alarm (if Battery Charge Digital Temperature

Compensation Probe is installed) .................................................................................................................. 4-17

Configuring Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Slope ........................................................ 4-18

Configuring Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Maximum Voltage .................................... 4-19

Configuring Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Minimum Voltage ..................................... 4-20

Configuring Degree Units Displayed ( F or C) ............................................................................................. 4-21

Configuring the System Date and Time ......................................................................................................... 4-22

Configuring MCA I/O Circuit Card Analog Input(s) ........................................................................................ 4-23

Configuring MCA I/O Circuit Card Analog Output(s) ..................................................................................... 4-25

Configuring MCA I/O Circuit Card Binary Input(s) ......................................................................................... 4-26

MCA Audible Alarm Cutoff Reset Time Period .............................................................................................. 4-27

MCA Rectifier Sequencing Feature ............................................................................................................... 4-27

Manually Initiated Timed Test/Equalize Feature ............................................................................................ 4-27

Automatic Test/Equalize Feature ................................................................................................................... 4-27

MCA Power Share Feature ............................................................................................................................ 4-27

Alarm Relay Test Feature .............................................................................................................................. 4-27

MCA “Alternate Current Limit” Feature .......................................................................................................... 4-27

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ................................................................................ 5-1

Admonishments ............................................................................................................................................... 5-2

General Safety ........................................................................................................................................... 5-2

Voltages ..................................................................................................................................................... 5-2

LMS Maintenance Procedures ......................................................................................................................... 5-2

System Maintenance Procedures .................................................................................................................... 5-3

Adding a Rectifier ............................................................................................................................................. 5-8

Table of Contents Page iii

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

CHAPTER 6 SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR ............................................... 6-1

Contact Information .......................................................................................................................................... 6-1

Admonishments ............................................................................................................................................... 6-2

General Safety ........................................................................................................................................... 6-2

Voltages ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-2

Circuit Card Handling ................................................................................................................................ 6-3

LMS Troubleshooting Procedures ................................................................................................................... 6-3

Troubleshooting Information ............................................................................................................................ 6-4

General ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-4

Adjustments ............................................................................................................................................... 6-4

MCA Messages ......................................................................................................................................... 6-4

Rectifier Current Sharing Unbalance ......................................................................................................... 6-5

Rectifier Module Fault Symptoms and Troubleshooting............................................................................ 6-6

Updating the Inventory after Changes to the System Have Been Made .................................................. 6-7

Replacement Information ................................................................................................................................. 6-8

Replacement Assemblies .......................................................................................................................... 6-8

Replacement Cables ................................................................................................................................. 6-8

Replacement Procedures ................................................................................................................................. 6-9

Rectifier Replacement ............................................................................................................................... 6-9

MCA Circuit Card Replacement .............................................................................................................. 6-11

Router Circuit Card Replacement............................................................................................................ 6-15

Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Card Replacement ........................................................................... 6-18

MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Card Replacement ......................................................................... 6-21

MCA I/O Circuit Card Replacement ......................................................................................................... 6-21

Alarm, Reference, and Control Fuse Replacement ................................................................................. 6-22

Rectifier Fan Replacement ...................................................................................................................... 6-25

Adding a Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Probe to a Previously Operated System ...... 6-26

Removing a Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Probe from a Previously Operated

System ........................................................................................................................................................... 6-27

REVISION RECORD

Page iv Table of Contents

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

CHAPTER 1

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Preface ............................................................................................................................ 1-2

System Description .......................................................................................................... 1-3

System Overview Illustrations ......................................................................................... 1-6

Power/Distribution Bay .............................................................................................. 1-6

Power Only Bay ........................................................................................................ 1-7

Distribution Only Bay ................................................................................................ 1-8

Detail A - Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Card ................................................... 1-9

Detail B - System Monitoring and Control Section .................................................. 1-10

Detail C - Monitoring and Control Section (Distribution Only Bays) ....................... 1-11

Detail D - Front Door (Primary Power/Distribution and Power Only Bays)

MCA Control Panel and Display ............................................................................. 1-12

Detail E - MCA Circuit Card (Primary Power/Distribution and Power Only

Bays) and Router Circuit Card (Secondary Power/Distribution and Power

Only Bays and Distribution Only Bays) ................................................................... 1-13

Detail F .................................................................................................................... 1-14

Details G - MCA I/O Circuit Cards .......................................................................... 1-15

Detail H - LMS I/O Circuit Cards ............................................................................. 1-16

Detail J - Rectifier .................................................................................................... 1-24

Chapter 1. System Overview Page 1-1

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

PREFACE

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

This document (Section 5877) provides User Instructions for NetSure ™ Power System

Model 802 NLDB (208V Input Power/Distribution and Power Only Bays), 802 NLEB (480V

Input Power/Distribution and Power Only Bays) and 802 NL B (Distribution Only Bay);

Spec. No. 582140000.

For an Installation Guide, refer to Section 5957 located in the separate INSTALLATION

MANUAL. This is a condensed version of the Installation Instructions (Section 5876).

Section 5876 can be accessed via the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.

Refer to SAG582140000 (System Application Guide) for additional information. The SAG can be accessed via the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.

For a color MCA Menu Tree, refer to Section 5886. Section 5886 is provided in the separate INSTALLATION MANUAL and the CD CARRIER MANUAL (it is also provided on the CD).

Your power system may contain an optional LMS Monitoring System, refer to Section

5879 (LMS1000 Installation Instructions) and Section 5847 (LMS1000 User Instructions) provided on the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.

Page 1-2 Chapter 1. System Overview

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

-48V DC @ up to 10,000 amperes power system.

This power system is designed to power a load while charging a positive grounded battery. This power system is capable of operating in a batteryless installation or off battery for maintenance purposes. This power system is designed for operation with the positive output grounded.

The NetSure™ 802

NLDB (208V Input Power/Distribution and Power Only Bays), 802 NLEB

(480V Input Power/Distribution and Power Only Bays), and 802 NL B (Distribution Only

Bay) DC Power System is a complete integrated power system containing rectifiers, intelligent control, metering, monitoring, and distribution. This power system consists of the following components.

Power/Distribution Bays

The system consists of one (1) Primary Power/Distribution Bay and up to nine (9)

Secondary Power/Distribution Bays.

Each Power/Distribution Bay can be equipped with up to ten (10) rectifiers and provides distribution. Distribution is divided into two buses which accept a choice of fuse and circuit breaker types and sizes.

Each Power/Distribution Bay contains a Monitor and Control Panel. In the Primary

Power/Distribution Bay, this panel houses the Meter-Control-Alarm (MCA) assembly.

This panel in the Primary Power/Distribution Bay also houses the optional LMS Main

CPU circuit card of the integrated LMS Monitoring System. In a Secondary

Power/Distribution Bay, this panel can be equipped with an optional LMS Expansion

CPU circuit card. (The optional LMS Monitoring System provides a higher level of monitoring and controlling capabilities to the power system.)

The Monitor and Control Panel in both Primary and Secondary Power/Distribution

Bays contain a seven-slot card cage to house MCA alarm relay circuit cards, MCA input/output (I/O) circuit cards, and optional LMS I/O circuit cards. (If a Secondary

Power/Distribution Bay is to be equipped with optional LMS I/O circuit cards, it must also be equipped with an LMS Expansion CPU circuit card.)

Power Only Bays

The system can consist of one (1) Primary Power Only Bay and up to nine (9)

Secondary Power Only Bays.

Each Power Only Bay can be equipped with up to ten (10) Rectifiers.

Each Power Only Bay contains a Monitor and Control Panel. In the Primary Power

Only Bay, this panel houses the Meter-Control-Alarm (MCA) assembly. This panel in the Primary Power Only Bay also houses the optional LMS Main CPU circuit card of the integrated LMS Monitoring System. In a Secondary Power Only Bay, this panel can be equipped with an optional LMS Expansion CPU circuit card. (The optional

LMS Monitoring System provides a higher level of monitoring and controlling capabilities to the power system.)

The Monitor and Control Panel in both Primary and Secondary Power Only Bays contain a seven-slot card cage to house MCA alarm relay circuit cards, MCA input/output (I/O) circuit cards, and optional LMS I/O circuit cards. (If a Secondary

Power Only Bay is to be equipped with optional LMS I/O circuit cards, it must also be equipped with an LMS Expansion CPU circuit card.)

Distribution Only Bays

The system consists of one (1) to eight (8) Distribution Only Bays.

Each Distribution Only Bay provides four (4) distribution buses.

Chapter 1. System Overview Page 1-3

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013 Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802

User Instructions

NLEB and 802 NL

Each distribution bus accepts a choice of 218-type circuit breakers and TPL-type fuses.

B )

A Distribution Only Bay may also be equipped with an optional distribution panel which accepts a choice of TPS/TLS-type fuseholders or Bullet Nose-type circuit breakers.

Rectifiers

The rectifiers provide load power, battery float current, and battery recharge current during normal operating conditions.

MCA (Meter-Control-Alarm)

The MCA controls the operation of the rectifiers and provides power system control, metering, monitoring, and alarm functions.

MCA Local Control Panel: This panel is located on the front of the Primary

Power/Distribution Bay or Power Only Bay and contains a keypad, display, and indicators for local MCA User interface.

MCA Relay Circuit Card: Each MCA relay circuit card provides six (6) sets of

Form-C relay contacts for customer external alarms. These relays are User programmable for various power system alarms. Up to sixteen (16) MCA relay circuit cards can be installed in the Primary and Secondary Power/Distribution and Power

Only Bays. The Primary Power/Distribution and Power Only Bays are factory equipped with two (2) MCA relay circuit cards.

MCA I/O Circuit Cards: The MCA I/O circuit cards provide analog inputs/outputs and binary inputs. Up to sixteen (16) MCA I/O circuit cards can be installed in the

Primary and Secondary Power/Distribution and Power Only Bays.

Optional Integrated LMS Monitoring System

The LMS Monitoring System consists of an LMS Main CPU circuit card, optional LMS

Expansion CPU circuit cards, optional LMS I/O circuit cards, optional LMS Expansion

Cabinet, and optional LMS Expansion Assemblies.

The LMS Main CPU circuit card is mounted in the Primary Power/Distribution and

Power Only Bays. Each Secondary Power/Distribution and Power Only Bay that is to be equipped with optional LMS I/O circuit cards must contain an LMS Expansion

CPU circuit card. LMS Expansion Cabinets and LMS Expansion Assemblies are available that mount into customer equipment.

The LMS Monitoring System is factory integrated within each Power/Distribution,

Power Only, and Distribution Only Bay and requires no additional customer interconnections within the bays. Simple cable connections between the

Power/Distribution, Power Only, and Distribution Only Bays complete the interbay connections required. Separate analog, binary, and relay circuit cards do not have to be supplied for power system monitoring. Analog, binary, relay, and temperature circuit cards can be provided to monitor equipment external to the power system.

The LMS input circuit cards monitor a variety of analog, binary, and temperature points external to the system. An LMS relay output circuit card is also available which provides programmable relays. These relays may be used for external alarms, or to control other equipment.

The LMS Monitoring System can be accessed via a local port, a modem port (when optional modem is ordered), an optional TL1 port, and an Ethernet port (for Telnet access, optional Web access, optional SNMP access, optional TL1 access, and

Email alarm reporting).

The LMS Monitoring System collects data from the power system and the input circuit cards monitoring external points. The data collected is used for alarm processing and reporting, and to provide statistics.

Page 1-4 Chapter 1. System Overview

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

The LMS Monitoring System is capable of reporting alarm conditions to a remote terminal, pager, Email address, via SNMP traps over Ethernet when the SNMP option is ordered, or via TL1 (over Ethernet) when the 'TL1 over Ethernet' option is ordered. TL1 is also available via a serial connection in 'direct mode'. For remote terminal or pager notification, the LMS Main CPU circuit card must be equipped with the optional modem. Two types of alarm reporting mechanisms are provided,

System Alarm Reporting and Individual User Alarm Reporting.

Refer to SAG586505000 for further LMS information. The SAG can be accessed via the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.

Applications

The NetSure ™ 802

NLDB and 802 NLEB is capable of interfacing with Vortex

®

Power

Systems (VPS).

The NetSure ™ 802

NLDB and 802 NLEB is capable of interfacing with legacy power systems.

Chapter 1. System Overview Page 1-5

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

SYSTEM OVERVIEW ILLUSTRATIONS

Power/Distribution Bay

Bay LED (Located on outside of front door)

Green = OK

Red = Bay Failure

Yellow (Flashing) = Communicating with MCA

Distribution Bus LED

Green = OK

Red = Distribution Bus Failure

Yellow (Flashing) = Communicating with MCA

Distribution

Bus #1

Spare

Fuseholders

(behind hinged panel)

Monitoring

Bus #1 Monitoring Circuit Card (See Detail A)

(behind hinged panel)

Distribution

Bus #2

Spare

Fuseholders

(behind hinged panel)

Monitoring

Bus #2 Monitoring Circuit Card (See Detail A)

(behind hinged panel)

System Monitoring and Control

See Detail B

(See Detail D for Front Door Illustration of MCA Control Panel)

Power

PCUs

(See Detail J)

Front Door Removed in

Illustration for Clarity

Note

Each MCA component (i.e. PCU, Bus Monitoring

Circuit Card, Bay Router Circuit Card, MCA Relay

Circuit Card) can be programmed with a custom text message for identification purposes.

25 Function Channels Provided

Program each to alarm for selected conditions, then program customer alarm relays (if furnished) to activate if a specific function channel alarms.

Page 1-6 Chapter 1. System Overview

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Power Only Bay

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Bay LED (Located on outside of front door)

Green = OK

Red = Bay Failure

Yellow (Flashing) = Communicating with MCA

System Monitoring and Control

See Detail B

(See Detail D for Front Door Illustration of MCA Control Panel)

Front Door Removed in

Illustration for Clarity

Power

PCUs

(See Detail J)

Note

Each MCA component (i.e. PCU, Bus Monitoring

Circuit Card, Bay Router Circuit Card, MCA Relay

Circuit Card) can be programmed with a custom text message for identification purposes.

25 Function Channels Provided

Program each to alarm for selected conditions, then program customer alarm relays (if furnished) to activate if a specific function channel alarms.

Chapter 1. System Overview Page 1-7

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Distribution Only Bay

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Opt ional List C

Bullet Nose

Device Panel

(not to scale)

Bay LED

Green = OK

Red = Bay Failure

Yellow (Flashing) = Communicating with MCA

Distribution Bus LED

Green = OK

Red = Distribution Bus Failure

Yellow (Flashing) = Communicating with MCA

D istribution

Bus #1

Monitoring

Bus #1 Monitoring

Circuit Card

(See Det ail A)*

(behind hinged panel)

Di stribution

Bus #2

Monitoring

Bus #2 Monitoring

Circuit Card

(See Detail A)*

(behind hinged panel)

Monitoring and Control Section

See Detail C

Distribution

Bus #3

Monitoring

Bus #3 Monitoring

Circui t Card

(See Detail A)*

(behind hinged panel)

* Spare Fuseholders are located behind hinged panel

Distribution

Bus #4

Monitoring

Bus #4 Monitoring

Circuit Card

(See Detail A)*

(behi nd hinged panel)

Front Door Removed in

Illustration for Clarity

Front View

Distribution Bay

Page 1-8 Chapter 1. System Overview

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Detail A - Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Card

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Identification

Indicator

Green = OK

Red = Failure

Yellow (Flashing) = Communicating with MCA

DISTRIBUTION BUS MONITORING CIRCUIT CARD

(P/N 524982)

Chapter 1. System Overview Page 1-9

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Detail B - System Monitoring and Control Section

MCA Network

Connector

(for Left Expansion)

MCA Network

Connector

(for Right Expansion)

MCA Temp. Comp.

Probe Connector

(Primary Bay Only)

External

CAN BUS

Port

LMS Ethernet

Port (Primary

Bay Only)

Power and FA

Indicators

MCA*

(Primary Bay) or

Router

(Secondary

Bay)

Circuit Card

(See Detail E)

Seven-Slot Card Cage for MCA Customer Alarm

Relay circuit cards, optional MCA I/O circuit cards, and/or optional LMS Input/Output I/O circuit cards.

Note: MCA circuit cards can be installed in any position. LMS I/O circuit cards MUST be populated left to right.

(See Detail H and I)

LMS

OEM Port

(RS-485)

(Primary Bay

Only)

LMS

Network

Ports

(Echelon)

Optional LMS Monitoring System

Main CPU Circuit Card** (Primary Bay) or Expansion CPU Circuit Card

(Secondary Bays)

(See Detail F)

* Note: MCA Circuit Card contains external reference and control terminal block.

Input Power Fuses

MCA/Router Circuit Card

**Note: LMS Main CPU Circuit Card, when equipped with the

Modem Circuit Card, contains the Modem Port.

LMS Main/Expansion CPU Circuit Card

Distribution Row #1 and #2 Monitoring Circuit Cards

SYSTEM MONITORING AND CONTROL SECTION

POWER/DISTRIBUTION AND POWER ONLY BAYS

Page 1-10 Chapter 1. System Overview

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Detail C - Monitoring and Control Section (Distribution Only Bays)

Chapter 1. System Overview Page 1-11

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Detail D - Front Door

(Primary Power/Distribution and Power Only Bays)

MCA Control Panel and Display

Alarm

Cutoff

Indicator

(Yellow)

Audible

Alarm

MAJOR

Indicator

(Flashes

Red)

MINOR

Indicator

(Red)

AC

Indicator

(Green - OK

Red - Fail)

TESTEQ

Indicator

(Yellow)

FUNCTION SET

YES / + / i

Pushbutton Switch

ENTER / /

Pushbutton Switch

NO / -

Pushbutton Switch

ALARM

CUTOFF

Pushbutton

Switch

LMS LOCAL PORT

(USB)

(active only if optional LMS installed)

(Provided via a USB Type B to RS-232 Port Adapter Unit)

FUNCTION

SELECT

Up / Down

Pushbutton

Switches

FRONT DOOR

(PRIMARY POWER/DISTRIBUTION AND POWER ONLY BAYS)

MCA CONTROL PANEL AND DISPLAY

5 1

9 6

Mating Connector in Power System Wire Harness

(9-Pin Female D-Type Jack)

If required to connect to a serial port, disconnect the factory plug to the

“USB to RS-232 Port Adapter

Unit

” and connect to this plug.

Page 1-12 Chapter 1. System Overview

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Detail E - MCA Circuit Card (Primary Power/Distribution and Power Only

Bays) and Router Circuit Card (Secondary Power/Distribution and Power

Only Bays and Distribution Only Bays)

* Automatic internal sense when not connected.

Note: If connected and removed, external

A/D Volt Alarm activates. Clear alarm by updating inventory.

*** Green = OK

Red = Failure

Yellow (Flashing) = Communicating with MCA

** Apply test contact closure, then apply

HVS or ESTOP closure to test these circuits.

See MCA display to verify circuits operational.

Dry Relay Contact

Closure to Activate

External

Voltage Input

(for MCA Alarms and Meter Reading*)

-VSense +VSense

MCA Network Connector

(for Left Expansion)

Remote

Equalize

Remote

HVS

Test

Input**

PCU

Emergency

Stop (ESTOP)

MCA Network Connector

(for Right Expansion)

RJ-45

Jack

RJ-45

Jack

1

MCA Network Connector

(for Left Expansion)

RJ-45

Jack

10

Identification

Indicator***

MCA

(PRIMARY POWER/DISTRIBUTION AND

POWER ONLY BAYS) (P/N 509478)

MCA Network Connector

(for Right Expansion)

RJ-45

Jack

Identification

Indicator***

ROUTER

(SECONDARY POWER/DISTRIBUTION AND

POWER ONLY BAYS AND DISTRIBUTION

ONLY BAYS) (P/N 509509)

Chapter 1. System Overview Page 1-13

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Detail F

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Piggy-Back Modem

Circuit Card

(P/N 508951)

Main LMS CPU

Circuit Card

(P/N 545558)

Expansion LMS CPU

Circuit Card

(P/N 506153)

Page 1-14 Chapter 1. System Overview

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Details G - MCA I/O Circuit Cards

Detail G1 - MCA Relay Circuit Card (P/N 514348)

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Identification

Indicator

Green = OK

Red = Failure

Yellow (Flashing) = Communicating with MCA

K3

NC

COM

NO

K2

NC

COM

NO

K1

NC

COM

NO

12

18 9 NC

COM

NO

K6

NC

COM

NO

K5

NC

COM

NO

K4

10

TB1

1

MCA RELAY CIRCUIT CARD

(P/N 514348)

Details G2 - MCA Analog/Binary Circuit Card P/N 524550

Identification

Indicator

Green = OK

Red = Failure

Yellow (Flashing) = Communicating with MCA

_

+

_

+

A1 OUT**

A1 IN*

B4***

* 0-50 mv DC Shunt Input

** 0-50 mv DC Output for Remote Plant Output Current Monitoring

*** Dry Contacts, Circuit Closure to Activate Alarm

B3***

B2***

B1***

MCA I/O CIRCUIT CARDS

(P/N 524550, 1 analog input, 1 analog output, 4 binary inputs)

1

TB1

Chapter 1. System Overview Page 1-15

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Detail H - LMS I/O Circuit Cards

Page 1-16 Chapter 1. System Overview

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Detail I1 - LMS 4 Input Analog Circuit Card (P/N 506336)

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

TB1

506336

3

2

1

6

5

8

7

4

11

10

9

16

15

14

13

12

A4

LARGE SIGNAL

(0-60 volts DC)

A4

A3

SMALL SIGNAL

(50 mv shunts, 100 mv shunts,

20 ma current loops)

LARGE SIGNAL

(0-60 volts DC)

A3

SMALL SIGNAL

(50 mv shunts, 100 mv shunts,

20 ma current loops)

A2

LARGE SIGNAL

(0-60 volts DC)

A2

SMALL SIGNAL

(50 mv shunts, 100 mv shunts,

20 ma current loops)

A1

LARGE SIGNAL

(0-60 volts DC)

A1

SMALL SIGNAL

(50 mv shunts, 100 mv shunts,

20 ma current loops)

Analog input wiring connection terminals

Note:

Analog input designations A1 through A4 as shown are for the circuit card only. The actual analog channel number depends upon the quantity of analog and temperature circuit cards installed and location of this analog circuit card in the system network.

LMS 4-INPUT ANALOG

CIRCUIT CARD (P/N 506336)

Chapter 1. System Overview Page 1-17

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Detail I2 - LMS 8 Input Analog Circuit Card (P/N 514528)

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

TB1

514528

7

6

9

8

5

2

1

4

3

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

A8

A7

A6

A5

A4

A3

A2

A1

50 mv Shunts Only

50 mv Shunts Only

50 mv Shunts Only

50 mv Shunts Only

50 mv Shunts Only

50 mv Shunts Only

50 mv Shunts Only

50 mv Shunts Only

Analog input wiring connection terminals

Note:

Analog input designations A1 through A8 as shown are for the circuit card only. The actual analog channel number depends upon the quantity of analog and temperature circuit cards installed and location of this analog circuit card in the system network.

LMS 8-INPUT ANALOG

CIRCUIT CARD (P/N 514528)

Page 1-18 Chapter 1. System Overview

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Detail I3 - LMS 8 Input Temperature Circuit Card (P/N 506333)

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

TB1

506333

6

5

8

7

4

10

9

3

2

1

16

15

14

13

12

11

A8

A7

A6

A5

A4

A3

A2

Temperature input wiring connection terminals

GREEN WIRE TO CABINET GROUND

Note:

Analog input designations A1 through A8 as shown are for the circuit card only. The actual analog channel number depends upon the quantity of analog and temperature circuit cards installed and location of this temperature circuit card in the system network.

LMS 8-INPUT TEMPERATURE

CIRCUIT CARD (P/N 506333)

Chapter 1. System Overview Page 1-19

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Detail I4 - LMS 4 Input Binary Circuit Card (P/N 506332)

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

TB1

506332

16

15

14

13

12

11

8

7

6

5

10

9

4

3

2

1

B4

B3

B2

B1

Binary input wiring connection terminals

Note:

Binary input designations B1 through B4 as shown are for the circuit card only. The actual binary channel number depends upon the quantity of binary circuit cards installed and the location of this binary circuit card in the system network.

LMS 4-INPUT BINARY

CIRCUIT CARD (P/N 506332)

Page 1-20 Chapter 1. System Overview

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Detail I5 - LMS 8 Input Binary Circuit Card (P/N 506334)

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

+BAT

-BAT

TB1

506334

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

4

3

6

5

2

1

9

8

7

B4

B3

B2

B1

B8

B7

B6

B5

Connections to Battery, as required

Note:

Needed only to complete binary input path as determined by placement of appropriate jumper. If all binary inputs require the same battery potential, only that potential needs to be connected.

Binary input wiring connection terminals

Note:

Binary input designations B1 through B8 as shown are for the circuit card only. The actual binary channel number depends upon the quantity of binary circuit cards installed and the location of this binary circuit card in the system network.

LMS 8-INPUT BINARY

CIRCUIT CARD (P/N 506334)

Chapter 1. System Overview Page 1-21

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Detail I6 - LMS 4 Output Relay Circuit Card (P/N 506335)

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

TB1

506335

4

3

6

5

2

1

8

7

10

9

16

15

14

13

12

11

NC

C K4

NO

NC

C

NO

K3

Relay output wiring connection terminals

NC

C K2

NO

NC

C K1

NO

Note:

Relay designations K1 through K4 as shown are for the circuit card only. The actual relay channel number depends upon the number of relay circuit cards installed and the location of this relay circuit card in the system network.

Relay contacts are shown with the relays deenergized.

LMS 4-OUTPUT RELAY

CIRCUIT CARD (P/N 506335)

Page 1-22 Chapter 1. System Overview

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Detail I7 - LMS 12 Input Analog Circuit Card (P/N 520838)

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

TB1

520838

4

3

6

5

2

1

8

7

10

9

16

15

14

13

12

11 unused unused unused

+ Terminal Battery Cell 12

+ Terminal Battery Cell 11

+ Terminal Battery Cell 10

+ Terminal Battery Cell 9

+ Terminal Battery Cell 8

+ Terminal Battery Cell 7

+ Terminal Battery Cell 6

+ Terminal Battery Cell 5

+ Terminal Battery Cell 4

+ Terminal Battery Cell 3

+ Terminal Battery Cell 2

+ Terminal Battery Cell 1

-- Terminal Battery Cell 11

(A12)

(A11)

(A10)

(A9)

(A8)

(A7)

(A6)

(A5)

(A4)

(A3)

(A2)

(A1)

Analog input wiring connection terminals

Note:

Analog input designations A1 through A12 as shown are for the circuit card only. The actual analog channel number depends upon the quantity of analog and temperature circuit cards installed and location of this analog circuit card in the system network.

LMS 12-INPUT ANALOG

CIRCUIT CARD (P/N 520838)

Chapter 1. System Overview Page 1-23

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Detail J - Rectifier

208V and 480V Rectifier

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Operate / Standby Switch

Operate

Standby

Output

Current

Bargraph

AC / Identify Indicator

Protection Alarm Indicator

Fail Alarm Indicator

Page 1-24 Chapter 1. System Overview

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

CHAPTER 2

NAVIGATING THE MCA

MCA LOCAL CONTROL PANEL AND DISPLAY

Located on the Primary Power/Distribution and Power Only Bays ’ front door.

Alarm

Cutoff

Indicator

(Yellow)

Audible

Alarm

MAJOR

Indicator

(Flashes

Red)

MINOR

Indicator

(Red)

AC

Indicator

(Green - OK

Red - Fail)

TESTEQ

Indicator

(Yellow)

FUNCTION SET

YES / + / i

Pushbutton Switch

ENTER / /

Pushbutton Switch

NO / -

Pushbutton Switch

ALARM

CUTOFF

Pushbutton

Switch

LMS LOCAL PORT

(USB)

(active only if optional LMS installed)

(Provided via a USB Type B to RS-232 Port Adapter Unit)

FUNCTION

SELECT

Up / Down

Pushbutton

Switches

5 1

9 6

Mating Connector in Power System Wire Harness

(9-Pin Female D-Type Jack)

FRONT DOOR

(PRIMARY POWER/DISTRIBUTION AND POWER ONLY BAYS)

MCA CONTROL PANEL AND DISPLAY

If required to connect to a serial port, disconnect the factory plug to the “USB to RS-232 Port Adapter

Unit ” and connect to this plug.

Navigating the MCA is an easy process. You just have to remember a few key combinations (as shown in the following chart). The symbols that appear at the end of the fourth line of the display indicate which keypad buttons can be pressed at any given time.

Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-1

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

TASK

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802

User Instructions

NLEB and 802 NL B

Getting to Home Position

Moving from One Menu to Another Menu

Moving Within a Menu

Changing a Value or Setting

Entering the

Adjustment/Change

Setting Mode

Changing the

Value or Setting

Locking the Change

Confirming the Change

Changing a Control Function

Entering the

Adjustment/Change

Setting Mode

Confirming the Change

KEY OR KEY COMBINATIONS

YES / + / i and NO / -

YES / + / i

NOTES

At any level in the MCA menus, pressing YES / + / i and NO / - simultaneously takes you back to the beginning of the MCA menu tree. NO / -

ENTER

ENTER / /

You can travel left to right from one menu to another by pressing ENTER.

You can also go back to a specified menu by pressing ENTER while the menu's name is being displayed.

UP ARROW, DOWN ARROW

FUNCTION

SELECT

Up

Down

Press UP ARROW to move up the list of available entries in the active menu.

Press DOWN ARROW to move down the list of available entries in the active menu.

ENTER and ALARM CUTOFF

ALARM

CUTOFF

ENTER / /

YES / + / i and NO / -

NO / -

ENTER

YES / + / i

ENTER / /

YES / + / i and NO / -

YES / + / i

Changing a value or setting requires four (4) steps.

1. With the current value or setting being displayed, simultaneously press ENTER and ALARM

CUTOFF.

2. To increase the value or change the setting, press YES / + / i. To decrease the value or change the setting, press NO / -.

3. With the correct value or setting being displayed, press ENTER.

4. To accept the change, at the

"ARE YOU SURE?" prompt press

YES / + / i. To reject the change, at the "ARE YOU SURE?" prompt press NO / -.

NO / -

ENTER and ALARM CUTOFF

ALARM

CUTOFF

ENTER / /

YES / + / i and NO / -

YES / + / i

NO / -

Changing a control function requires two (2) steps.

1. With the control function menu item being displayed, simultaneously press ENTER and

ALARM CUTOFF.

2. To accept the change, at the

"ARE YOU SURE?" prompt press the YES / + / i. To reject the change, at the "ARE YOU

SURE?" prompt press NO / -.

)

Page 2-2 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MCA NUMBERING SCHEME

The MCA identifies (numbers) the components of the system as follows.

MCA IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

COMPONENT

MCA NUMBERING

SCHEME (note that each line shown below is separated with a dash in the MCA display)

NOTES EXAMPLE

MCA/Router

Rectifier

(PCU)

MCA Relay

Circuit Card

Bay #

Bay #

Card Position # w/in Bay

Relay # w/in Card

Primary Bay is #1, other bays are numbered consecutively, following the bay-to-bay cabling scheme.

Bay #

MCA Rectifier # within the Bay / # of

Rectifiers Installed in System

Primary Bay is #1, other bays are numbered consecutively, following the bay-to-bay cabling scheme.

Rectifiers are identified from 1 to 10, as they are powered-up and recognized by the MCA.

Primary Bay is #1, other bays are numbered consecutively, following the bay-to-bay cabling scheme.

Card #1 = left slot,

Card #7 = right slot.

Relay # (see illustration in System Overview

Chapter)

Primary Bay

1

Second Bay

2

Fifth Bay

5

Primary Bay, First

Recognized Rectifier

(w/ 36 rectifiers installed)

1-01/36

Second Bay, Third

Recognized Rectifier

(w/ 24 rectifiers installed)

2-03/24

Fifth Bay, Tenth

Recognized Rectifier

(w/ 12 rectifiers installed)

5-10/12

Primary Bay, Relay

Card in First Slot,

Relay One on Card

1-1-1

Second Bay, Relay

Card in Third Slot,

Relay Four on Card

2-3-4

Fifth Bay, Relay Card in Seventh Slot, Relay

Six on Card

5-7-6

Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-3

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013 Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802

User Instructions

NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

COMPONENT

MCA NUMBERING

SCHEME (note that each line shown below is separated with a dash in the MCA display)

NOTES EXAMPLE

MCA I/O

Circuit Card

Distribution

Bus (Power/

Distribution

Bays)

Distribution

Device

(Power/

Distribution

Bays)

Bay #

Card Position # w/in Bay

Bay #

Distribution Bus # w/in Bay (A or B

Designation)

Type

Bay #

Distribution Point # w/in Bay

Primary Bay is #1, other bays are numbered consecutively, following the bay-to-bay cabling scheme.

Card #1 = left slot,

Card #7 = right slot.

Primary Bay is #1, other bays are numbered consecutively, following the bay-to-bay cabling scheme.

Distribution Bus #1 = Top,

Distribution Bus #2 = Bottom.

A or B as set by jumper on MCA Distribution

Bus Monitoring Circuit Card.

Type = Breaker, Fuse, or Plug-In.

Primary Bay is #1, other bays are numbered consecutively, following the bay-to-bay cabling scheme.

Distribution Point =

1-24 (left - right, Top Bus, Bus #1).

25-36 (left - right, Bottom Bus, Bus #2).

Note that distribution components may take more than one mounting position, designation number is the left most mounting position.

Primary Bay, I/O Card in First Slot

1-1

Second Bay, I/O Card in Third Slot

2-3

Fifth Bay, I/O Card in

Seventh Slot

5-7

Primary Bay, Top Bus,

Set for A Designation

1-1A

Second Bay, Bottom

Bus, Set for B

Designation

2-2B

Fifth Bay, Top Bus,

Designation Not Set

5-1

Primary Bay, Circuit

Breaker Mounted in

Position One, Bus 1

Set for A Designation

Breaker 1-01A

Second Bay, Fuse

Mounted in Position

Sixteen, Bus 1

Designation Not Set

Fuse 2-16

Fifth Bay, Plug-In

Mounted in Position

Twenty-Six, Bus 2 Set for B Designation

Plug-In 5-26B

Page 2-4 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

COMPONENT

MCA NUMBERING

SCHEME (note that each line shown below is separated with a dash in the MCA display)

NOTES

Distribution

Only Bay’s

Distribution

Bus

Distribution

Only Bay’s

Distribution

Device

Bay #

Distribution Bus # w/in Bay (A or B

Designation)

Type

Bay #

Distribution Point # w/in Bay

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

EXAMPLE

Primary Bay is #1, other bays are numbered consecutively, following the bay-to-bay cabling scheme.

Distribution Bus #1 = Top Left,

Distribution Bus #2 = Top Right,

Distribution Bus #3 = Bottom Left,

Distribution Bus #4 = Bottom Right,

A or B as set by jumper on MCA Distribution

Bus Monitoring Circuit Card.

Fifth Bay, Top Left

Bus, Set for B

Designation

5-1B

Sixth Bay, Top Right

Bus, Set for B

Designation

6-2B

Seventh Bay, Bottom

Left Bus, Set for B

Designation

7-3B

Seventh Bay, Bottom

Right Bus, Designation

Not Set

7-4

Type = Breaker or Fuse or MISC 50-73.

Primary Bay is #1, other bays are numbered consecutively, following the bay-to-bay cabling scheme.

Distribution Point =

1-12 (bottom - top, Top Left Bus, Bus #1).

13-24 (top - bottom, Top Right Bus, Bus #2).

25-36 (bottom - top, Bottom Left Bus, Bus #3).

37-48 (top - bottom, Bottom Right Bus, Bus #4).

Note that distribution components may take more than one mounting position, designation number is the left most mounting position.

Note: The optional bullet-device fuse panel is displayed as MISC 50-73.

Fifth Bay, Circuit

Breaker Mounted in

Position One, Bus 1

Set for A Designation

Breaker 5-01A

Sixth Bay, Fuse

Mounted in Position

Thirteen, Bus 2

Designation Not Set

Fuse 6-13

Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-5

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

MCA MESSAGES

The following chart provides an explanation of each MCA message appearing on the

MCA Menu Tree (Section 5886). The MCA Menu Tree is located in the separate

INSTALLATION MANUAL and the CD CARRIER MANUAL (it is also provided on the

CD). Note that each line in the MCA Menu Tree contains a number. This number is referenced in the following chart.

Message Displayed

Associated with ...

Definition

1

2

2A

3

3A

4

4A

5

5A

6

6A

EMERGENCY STOP

INPUT ACTIVE

HI VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN

INPUT ACTIVE

ALTERNATE CURRENT

LIMIT ACTIVE

SYSTEM VOLTAGE IS

VERY LOW

ALARM LIMIT vv.vvV

NOW AT vv.vvV

SYSTEM BATTERY IS ON

DISCHARGE

ALARM LIMIT vv.vvV

NOW AT vv.vvV

SYSTEM HIGH VOLTAGE

#1 ALARM

ALARM LIMIT vv.vvV

NOW AT vv.vvV

SYSTEM HIGH VOLTAGE

#2 ALARM

ALARM LIMIT vv.vvV

NOW AT vv.vvV

Main

Alarm Menu

Main

Alarm Menu

Main

Alarm Menu

Main

Alarm Menu

--

Main

Alarm Menu

--

Main

Alarm Menu

--

Main

Alarm Menu

--

Rectifier Module (PCU) emergency shutdown or fire alarm disconnect signal applied to the system.

High voltage shutdown signal applied to the system.

Indicates that all rectifier modules (PCUs) are operating in the “Alternate Current Limit” mode.

Rectifier output current will be limited to the percent of capacity specified by the “Alternate

Current Limit Capacity” parameter setting.

System voltage below a preset adjustable value, indicating that the battery has been continuously supplying the load and has discharged to approximately half its reserve time.

Press ENTER to view the alarm limit setpoint and the current value of the monitored input.

Displays the alarm limit setpoint and the actual value of the monitored input.

System voltage below a preset adjustable value, indicating that the battery is supplying the load and is discharging.

Press ENTER to view the alarm limit setpoint and the current value of the monitored input.

Displays the alarm limit setpoint and the actual value of the monitored input.

System voltage above a preset adjustable value.

Press ENTER to view the alarm limit setpoint and the current value of the monitored input.

Displays the alarm limit setpoint and the actual value of the monitored input.

System voltage above a preset adjustable value.

Press ENTER to view the alarm limit setpoint and the current value of the monitored input.

Displays the alarm limit setpoint and the actual value of the monitored input.

Page 2-6 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

Associated with ...

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

1 SYSTEM BREAKER OR

FUSE ALARM

or

### SYSTEM BREAKER &

FUSE ALARMS

F/CB/PI B#-P#A/B

IS OPEN

GO TO MAIN ALARM

MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

AC POWER IS OFF TO

ALL PCUs

1 PCU

HAS FAILED

or

### PCUs

HAVE FAILED

or

NO PCUs ARE

IN INVENTORY

PCU B#-ID#/N#

FAILURE

### REMOTE PCUS

HAVE FAILED

1 REMOTE PCU

HAS FAILED

GO TO MAIN ALARM

MENU

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Definition

Main

Alarm Menu

Fuse

Alarm Menu

One or more system fuses or circuit breakers open. (### = number of open system fuses or circuit breakers.)

Press ENTER to view which fuse(s) or circuit breaker(s) is open.

Note that the individual fuses and circuit breakers in the bullet nose-type device holders

(plug-in) are not counted. If any number within a bullet nose-type device holder (plug-in) are open, only one will be counted.

Identification of open system fuse or circuit breaker. (F/CB/PI B#-P#A/B = Fuse or Circuit

Breaker or PlugIn, Bay Number-Distribution

Device Position Number [Group A or B

Designation if applicable.])

Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to scroll if multiple distribution devices are open.

Fuse

Alarm Menu

Fuse

Alarm Menu

Main

Alarm Menu

Main

Alarm Menu

PCU

Alarm Menu

PCU

Alarm Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

AC input voltage to all Rectifier Modules

(PCUs) below a preset non-adjustable value.

One or more Rectifier Modules (PCUs) failed.

(### = number of failed Rectifier Modules

[PCUs].)

Press ENTER to view which Rectifier Module

(PCU) failed. or

If the MCA does not recognize any Rectifier

Module (PCU), NO PCUs ARE IN INVENTORY is displayed.

Identification of failed Rectifier Module (PCU).

(B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier Module

MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier

Modules in System.)

Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to scroll if multiple Rectifier Modules failed.

Press ENTER to view why Rectifier Module failed.

More than one Remote Rectifier (PCU) failed.

(### = number of failed Remote Rectifiers

[PCUs].)

PCU

Alarm Menu

PCU

Alarm Menu

One Remote Rectifier (PCU) failed.

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-7

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

17

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

18

PCU B#-ID#/N#

EMERG. STOP

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

PCU B#-ID#/N#

H.V. SHUTDOWN

PCU B#-ID#/N#

AC LINE OFF

PCU B#-ID#/N#

AC LINE LOW

PCU B#-ID#/N#

AC LINE HIGH

PCU B#-ID#/N#

AC PHASE LOST

PCU B#-ID#/N#

POWER FACTOR

PCU B#-ID#/N#

DC/DC CONV.

PCU B#-ID#/N#

FUSE/BREAKER

PCU B#-ID#/N#

INHIBITED

PCU B#-ID#/N#

ON STANDBY

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Associated with ...

Definition

PCU

Alarm Menu

PCU Alarm

Detail Menu

PCU Alarm

Detail Menu

PCU Alarm

Detail Menu

PCU Alarm

Detail Menu

PCU Alarm

Detail Menu

PCU Alarm

Detail Menu

PCU Alarm

Detail Menu

PCU Alarm

Detail Menu

PCU Alarm

Detail Menu

PCU Alarm

Detail Menu

PCU Alarm

Detail Menu

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Rectifier Module (PCU) is in Emergency Stop

Mode. (B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier

Module MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier

Modules in System.)

Rectifier Module (PCU) is in High Voltage

Shutdown. (B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier

Module MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier

Modules in System.)

No AC Input to Rectifier Module (PCU) or

Rectifier Module's (PCU’s) processor failed.

(B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier Module

MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier

Modules in System.)

Rectifier Module's (PCU’s) Low AC Line Alarm active. (B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier

Module MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier

Modules in System.)

Rectifier Module's (PCU’s) High AC Line Alarm active. (B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier

Module MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier

Modules in System.)

Rectifier Module's (PCU’s) AC Line Phase Lost

Alarm active. (B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-

Rectifier Module MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of

Rectifier Modules in System.)

Rectifier Module's (PCU’s) internal power factor circuit failed. (B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-

Rectifier Module MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of

Rectifier Modules in System.)

Rectifier Module's (PCU’s) internal DC/DC converter circuit failed. (B#-ID#/N# = Bay

Number-Rectifier Module MCA ID# w/in

Bay/Number of Rectifier Modules in System.)

Rectifier Module's (PCU’s) DC output fuse open. (B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier

Module MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier

Modules in System.)

Rectifier Module's (PCU’s) output inhibited.

(B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier Module

MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier

Modules in System.)

Rectifier Module's ( PCU’s) Standby/Operate switch is in the "standby" position. (B#-ID#/N#

= Bay Number-Rectifier Module MCA ID# w/in

Bay/Number of Rectifier Modules in System.)

Page 2-8 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

Associated with ...

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

PCU B#-ID#/N#

THERMAL LIMIT

PCU B#-ID#/N#

THERMAL STOP

PCU B#-ID#/N#

HIGH AMBIENT

PCU B#-ID#/N#

LOAD SHARE

PCU B#-ID#/N#

1 FAN SPEED

PCU B#-ID#/N#

2+ FANS SPEED

PCU B#-ID#/N#

NO VOLT SENSE

PCU B#-ID#/N#

DUPLICATED

PCU B#-ID#/N#

NO RESPONSE

GO TO PCU ALARM MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

1 DIST. PANEL

HAS FAILED

or

## DIST. PANELS

HAVE FAILED

or

NO DIST. PANELS ARE

IN INVENTORY

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Definition

PCU Alarm

Detail Menu

PCU Alarm

Detail Menu

PCU Alarm

Detail Menu

PCU Alarm

Detail Menu

PCU Alarm

Detail Menu

PCU Alarm

Detail Menu

Rectifier Module (PCU) in Thermal Current

Limit. (B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier

Module MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier

Modules in System.)

Rectifier Module (PCU) in Thermal Shutdown.

(B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier Module

MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier

Modules in System.)

Rectifier Module's (PCU’s) High Temperature

Alarm active. (B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-

Rectifier Module MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of

Rectifier Modules in System.)

Load is not balanced with the other Rectifier

Modules (PCUs). (B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-

Rectifier Module MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of

Rectifier Modules in System.)

1 Rectifier Module (PCU) Fan Fail Alarm active. (B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier

Module MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier

Modules in System.)

2 or more Rectifier Module (PCU) Fan Fail

Alarms active. (B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-

Rectifier Module MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of

Rectifier Modules in System.)

PCU Alarm

Detail Menu

PCU Alarm

Detail Menu

Not used at this time.

Duplicated Reference Designations.

PCU Alarm

Detail Menu

MCA communications with Rectifier Module

(PCU) lost. (B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier

Module MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier

Modules in System.)

PCU Alarm

Detail Menu

PCU Alarm

Detail Menu

Main

Alarm Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

One or more Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit

Cards failed. (## = number of failed

Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Cards.)

Press ENTER to view which Distribution Bus

Monitoring Circuit Card(s) failed. or

If the MCA does not recognize any Distribution

Bus Monitoring Circuit Card, NO DIST.

PANELS ARE IN INVENTORY is displayed.

Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-9

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

Message Displayed

DIST. PANEL B#-P#A/B

FAILURE

GO TO MAIN ALARM

MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

DIST. PANEL B#-P#A/B

DISCONNECTED

or

DIST. PANEL B#-P#A/B

RECONNECT?

POSITION B#-P#A/B

NOT FOUND

or

POSITION NOT FOUND

PANEL B#-P#A/B

POSITION B#-P#A/B

TYPE UNKNOWN

F/CB/PI B#-P#A/B

OVER CURRENT

DIST. PANEL B#-P#A/B

LVD FAILURE

DIST. PANEL B#-P#A/B

A/B CHANGED

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802

User Instructions

NLEB and 802 NL B

Associated with ...

Definition

Distribution

Alarm Menu

Identification of failed Distribution Bus

Monitoring Circuit Card. (B#-P# A/B = Bay

Number-Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit

Card Position Number [Group A or B

Designation if applicable.])

Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to scroll if multiple Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit

Cards failed.

Press ENTER to view why Distribution Bus

Monitoring Circuit Card failed.

Distribution

Alarm Menu

Distribution

Alarm Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Distribution

Alarm

Detail Menu

Not utilized at this time.

Distribution

Alarm

Detail Menu

Distribution

Alarm

Detail Menu

Distribution

Alarm

Detail Menu

Distribution

Alarm

Detail Menu

MCA cannot find a distribution device.

(B#-P#A/B = Bay Number-Distribution Device

Position Number [Group A or B Designation if applicable.])

(B#-P#A/B = Bay Number-Distribution Bus

Monitoring Circuit Card Position Number

[Group A or B Designation if applicable.])

Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to scroll if multiple distribution devices not found.

MCA cannot identify the distribution device.

(B#-P#A/B = Bay Number-Distribution Device

Position Number [Group A or B Designation if applicable.])

Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to scroll if multiple distribution devices not identified.

Distribution device current is above the shunt's rating. (F/CB/PI B#-P#A/B = Fuse or Circuit

Breaker or PlugIn, Bay Number-Distribution

Device Position Number [Group A or B

Designation if applicable.])

Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to scroll if multiple shunts are over-ranged.

Distribution

Alarm

Detail Menu

Not utilized at this time.

Group A / Group B jumper setting on

Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Card changed. (B#-P# = Bay Number-Distribution

Bus Monitoring Circuit Card Position Number)

)

Page 2-10 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

Associated with ...

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

DIST. PANEL B#-P#A/B

PROCESSOR

DIST. PANEL B#-P#A/B IS

DUPLICATED

DIST. PANEL B#-P#A/B

NO RESPONSE

GO TO DISTRIBUTION

ALARM MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

1 I/O BOARD

HAS FAILED

or

## I/O BOARDS

HAVE FAILED

or

NO I/O BOARD S ARE

IN INVENTORY

I/O BOARD B#-P#

FAILURE

GO TO MAIN ALARM

MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Definition

Distribution

Alarm

Detail Menu

Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Card's processor failed. (B#-P#A/B = Bay Number-

Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Card

Position Number [Group A or B Designation if applicable.])

Distribution

Alarm

Detail Menu

Duplicated Reference Designations.

Distribution

Alarm

Detail Menu

MCA communications with Distribution Bus

Monitoring Circuit Card lost. (B#-P# = Bay

Number-Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit

Card Position Number)

Distribution

Alarm

Detail Menu

Distribution

Alarm

Detail Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Main

Alarm Menu

I/O Board

Alarm Menu

One or more MCA I/O Circuit Cards failed. (##

= number of failed MCA I/O Circuit Cards.)

Press ENTER to view which MCA I/O Circuit

Card(s) failed. or

If the MCA does not recognize any MCA I/O

Circuit Card, NO I/O BOARDS ARE IN

INVENTORY is displayed.

Identification of failed MCA I/O Circuit Card.

(B#-P# = Bay Number-MCA I/O Circuit Card

Position Number.)

Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to scroll if multiple MCA I/O Circuit Cards failed.

Press ENTER to view why MCA I/O Circuit

Card failed.

I/O Board

Alarm Menu

I/O Board

Alarm Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-11

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

59

60

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

Message Displayed

Binary Input Customer

Text Message

I/O BOARD B#-P#

OVER CURRENT

I/O BOARD B#-P#

PROCESSOR

I/O BOARD B#-P# IS

DUPLICATED

I/O BOARD B#-P#

NO RESPONSE

GO TO I/O BOARD

ALARM MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

1 ROUTER

HAS FAILED

or

## ROUTERS

HAVE FAILED

or

NO ROUTERS ARE

IN INVENTORY

ROUTER B#

FAILURE

GO TO MAIN ALARM

MENU

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802

User Instructions

NLEB and 802 NL B

Associated with ...

Definition

I/O Board

Alarm Detail

Menu

I/O Board

Alarm Detail

Menu

Custom test message stored in MCA for binary input that is in alarm state. If multiple inputs in alarm state, scroll through each.

Note: Refer to System Operating Procedures chapter in Section 5877 for procedure how to enter custom test messages. Refer to

Installing the Rectifier Modules and Initially

Starting the Power System chapter in Section

5876 for procedure how to program binary input alarm state (either open or close contact state).

If the current reflected by the analog inputs or outputs gets up to 95% of the shunt rating, the

I/O board activates an over current alarm.

(B#-P# = Bay Number-MCA I/O Circuit Card

Position Number.)

I/O Board

Alarm Detail

Menu

MCA I/O Circuit Card's processor failed.

(B#-P# = Bay Number-MCA I/O Circuit Card

Position Number.)

I/O Board

Alarm Detail

Menu

Duplicated Reference Designations.

I/O Board

Alarm Detail

Menu

MCA communications with MCA I/O Circuit

Card lost. (B#-P# = Bay Number-MCA I/O

Circuit Card Position Number.)

I/O Board

Alarm Detail

Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

I/O Board

Alarm Detail

Menu

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Main

Alarm Menu

Router

Alarm Menu

One or more Router Circuit Cards failed. (## = number of failed Router Circuit Cards.)

Press ENTER to view which Router Circuit

Card(s) failed. or

If the MCA does not recognize any Router

Circuit Card, NO ROUTERS ARE IN

INVENTORY is displayed.

Identification of failed Router Circuit Card. (B#

= Bay Number.)

Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to scroll if multiple Router Circuit Cards failed.

Press ENTER to view why Router Circuit Card failed.

Router

Alarm Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

)

Page 2-12 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

Associated with ...

69

70

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

78

79

80

81

82

83

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

ROUTER B# REMOTE

SENSE OPEN

ROUTER B# INTERNAL

SENSE OPEN

ROUTER B# PROCESSOR

ROUTER B# REPORTS AN

ILLEGAL NODE

ROUTER B# IS

DUPLICATED

ROUTER B#

NO RESPONSE

GO TO ROUTER ALARM

MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

1 RELAY BOARD

HAS FAILED

or

## RELAY BOARDS

HAVE FAILED

or

NO RELAY BOARDS ARE

IN INVENTORY

RELAY BOARD B#-P#

FAILURE

GO TO MAIN ALARM

MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

RELAY B#-P#-R# IS

STUCK

RELAY BOARD B#-P#

PROCESSOR

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Definition

Router

Alarm Menu

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Router Alarm

Detail Menu

Router Circuit Card External A/D Voltage Alarm active. (B# = Bay Number.)

Router Alarm

Detail Menu

Router Circuit Card Internal A/D Voltage Alarm active. (B# = Bay Number.)

Router Alarm

Detail Menu

Router Circuit Card's processor failed. (B# =

Bay Number.)

Router Alarm

Detail Menu

MCA dose not recognize a node's type or identification number. (B# = Bay Number.)

Router Alarm

Detail Menu

Duplicated Reference Designations.

Router Alarm

Detail Menu

MCA communications with Router Circuit Card lost. (B# = Bay Number.)

Router Alarm

Detail Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Router Alarm

Detail Menu

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Main

Alarm Menu

Relay

Alarm Menu

One or more MCA Customer Alarm Relay

Circuit Cards failed. (## = number of failed

MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Cards.)

Press ENTER to view which MCA Customer

Alarm Relay Circuit Card(s) failed. or

If the MCA does not recognize any MCA

Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Card, NO

RELAY BOARDS ARE IN INVENTORY is displayed.

Identification of failed MCA Customer Alarm

Relay Circuit Card. (B#-P# = Bay Number-

Relay Circuit Card Position Number.)

Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to scroll if multiple MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit

Cards failed.

Press ENTER to view why MCA Customer

Alarm Relay Circuit Card failed.

Relay

Alarm Menu

Relay

Alarm Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Relay Alarm

Detail Menu

Relay Alarm

Detail Menu

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Relay does not change state. (B#-P#-R# =

Bay Number-Relay Circuit Card Position

Number-Relay Number on Card.)

MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Card's processor failed. (B#-P# = Bay Number-Relay

Circuit Card Position Number.)

Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-13

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

84

RELAY BOARD B#-P# IS

DUPLICATED

85

86

87

RELAY BOARD B#-P#

NO RESPONSE

GO TO RELAY ALARM

MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

88

88A

HIGH TEMPERATURE #1

ALARM

ALARM LIMIT ttt°C/F

NOW AT ttt°C/F

89

89A

90

90A

91

HIGH TEMPERATURE #2

ALARM

ALARM LIMIT ttt°C/F

NOW AT ttt°C/F

LOW TEMPERATURE #1

ALARM

ALARM LIMIT ttt°C/F

NOW AT ttt°C/F

LOW TEMPERATURE #2

ALARM

91A

92

93

94

ALARM LIMIT ttt°C/F

NOW AT ttt°C/F

TEMPERATURE SENSOR

NO SIGNAL

MAJOR MONITORING

ALARM(S)

or

Monitoring Major

LED Messages

MINOR MONITORING

ALARM(S)

or

Monitoring Minor

LED Messages

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Associated with ...

Definition

Relay Alarm

Detail Menu

Duplicated Reference Designations.

Relay Alarm

Detail Menu

MCA communications with MCA Customer

Alarm Relay Circuit Card lost. (B#-P# = Bay

Number-Relay Circuit Card Position Number.)

Relay Alarm

Detail Menu

Relay Alarm

Detail Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Main

Alarm Menu

--

Main

Alarm Menu

--

Main

Alarm Menu

--

Main

Alarm Menu

--

Main

Alarm Menu

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Battery ambient temperature above preset adjustable value.

Press ENTER to view the alarm limit setpoint and the current value of the monitored input.

Displays the alarm limit setpoint and the actual value of the monitored input.

Battery ambient temperature above preset adjustable value.

Press ENTER to view the alarm limit setpoint and the current value of the monitored input.

Displays the alarm limit setpoint and the actual value of the monitored input.

Battery ambient temperature below preset adjustable value.

Press ENTER to view the alarm limit setpoint and the current value of the monitored input.

Displays the alarm limit setpoint and the actual value of the monitored input.

Battery ambient temperature below preset adjustable value.

Press ENTER to view the alarm limit setpoint and the current value of the monitored input.

Displays the alarm limit setpoint and the actual value of the monitored input.

MCA Temperature Sensor signal lost, if

Temperature Sensor installed.

Main

Alarm Menu

Major Alarm conditions detected by LMS1000.

Alarm Messages derived from LMS1000 are displayed by the MCA.

Main

Alarm Menu

Minor Alarm conditions detected by LMS1000.

Alarm Messages derived from LMS1000 are displayed by the MCA.

Page 2-14 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

Associated with ...

95

96

97

98

99

99A

100

100A

101

101A

102

103

104

105

MONITORING

INFORMATION

or

Monitoring Info

LED Messages

MONITORING DOES NOT

RESPOND

CONTROLLER FAILURE

####

THE CONTROLLER IS

INITIALIZING

TOTAL LOAD CURRENT

ALARM

ALARM LIMIT aaaaaA

NOW AT aaaaaA

DISTRIBUTION GROUP A

LOAD ALARM

ALARM LIMIT aaaaaA

NOW AT aaaaaA

DISTRIBUTION GROUP B

LOAD ALARM

ALARM LIMIT aaaaaA

NOW AT aaaaaA

THE DISPLAY DOES NOT

RESPOND

GO TO FUNCTION MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

VIEW THE SYSTEM

MEASUREMENTS

Main

Alarm Menu

Main

Alarm Menu

Main

Alarm Menu

Main

Alarm Menu

Main

Alarm Menu

--

Main

Alarm Menu

--

Main

Alarm Menu

--

Main

Alarm Menu

Main

Alarm Menu

Main

Alarm Menu

Function

Menu

MCA communications with LMS1000 lost.

MCA failed (#### = type of memory failure)

The MCA is initializing.

System load current above preset adjustable value (includes distribution loads monitored by the Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Cards and any MCA I/O Circuit Card set as

"Distribution" [other setting choice is

"Auxiliary"]).

Press ENTER to view the alarm limit setpoint and the current value of the monitored input.

Displays the alarm limit setpoint and the actual value of the monitored input.

Sum of load currents monitored by all

Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Cards set as

Group A designation above preset adjustable value.

Press ENTER to view the alarm limit setpoint and the current value of the monitored input.

Displays the alarm limit setpoint and the actual value of the monitored input.

Sum of load currents monitored by all

Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Cards set as

Group B designation above preset adjustable value.

Press ENTER to view the alarm limit setpoint and the current value of the monitored input.

Displays the alarm limit setpoint and the actual value of the monitored input.

MCA communications with MCA Display lost.

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Definition

Status Messages detected by LMS1000.

Status Messages derived from LMS1000 are

displayed by the MCA.

Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-15

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

Message Displayed

SYSTEM OUTPUT SENSE vv.vvV (REM)

or

SYSTEM OUTPUT SENSE vv.vvV (AVG)

ROUTER B# REMOTE

SENSE vv.vvV

ROUTER B# INTERNAL

SENSE vv.vvV

GO TO MEASUREMENT

MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

TOTAL SYSTEM

LOAD aaaaaA

TOTAL DISTRIBUTION

LOAD aaaaaA

or

TOTAL AUXILIARY

LOAD aaaaaA

DISTRIBUTION GROUP A

LOAD aaaaaA

DISTRIBUTION GROUP B

LOAD aaaaaA

REMOTE SYSTEM

LOAD aaaaaA

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802

User Instructions

NLEB and 802 NL B

Associated with ...

Definition

The voltage of the external (remote) source connected to the MCA / Router circuit card (for

MCA alarms and meter reading), if connected.

Measurement

Menu or

System output sense voltage (average of all bay's internal sense voltages).

Press ENTER to view individual bay sense voltages.

Router

Voltage

Menu

External (remote) sense voltage applied to the

MCA / Router Circuit Card, if connected. (B# =

Bay Number).

Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to view other

Router Circuit Cards' sense voltages.

Router

Voltage

Menu

Internal sense voltage applied to the Router

Circuit Card. (B# = Bay Number).

Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to view other

Router Circuit Cards' sense voltages.

Router

Voltage

Menu

Router

Voltage

Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Measurement

Menu

Total system load current.

System

Load Menu

System

Load Menu

System

Load Menu

System

Load Menu

Total distribution load current (includes distribution loads monitored by the Distribution

Bus Monitoring Circuit Cards and any MCA I/O

Circuit Card set as "Distribution" [other setting choice is "Auxiliary"]).

Press ENTER to view individual bay distribution load currents. or

Total (sum) load current monitored by MCA I/O

Circuit Cards set as "Auxiliary".

Press ENTER to view individual MCA I/O circuit card load currents.

Total load current monitored by Distribution

Bus Monitoring Circuit Cards set as Group A designation.

Total load current monitored by Distribution

Bus Monitoring Circuit Cards set as Group B designation.

Total Remote Distribution load current reported by the LMS when LMS Function Channel 63 value is greater than zero.

)

Page 2-16 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

Associated with ...

116

117

GO TO MEASUREMENT

MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

System

Load Menu

System

Load Menu

118

119

DIST. PANEL B#-P#A/B

LOAD aaaaaA

I/O BOARD B#-P#

LOAD aaaaaA

Distribution

Load Menu

Distribution

Load Menu

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Definition

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Sum of load currents monitored by the

Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Card.

(B#-P#A/B = Bay Number-Distribution Bus

Monitoring Circuit Card Position Number

[Group A or B Designation if applicable.])

Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to view other

Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Cards' load currents.

Press ENTER to view individual distribution device load currents.

Load current monitored by the first MCA I/O

Circuit Card (set as "Distribution" or "Auxiliary" as determined by what is being displayed on line #112). (B#-P# = Bay Number-MCA I/O

Circuit Card Position Number.)

Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to view other

MCA I/O Circuit Cards' load currents.

120

121

GO TO SYSTEM LOAD

MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

Distribution

Load Menu

Distribution

Load Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

122

F/CB/MISC 50-73 B#-P#A/B

LOAD aaaaaA

Distribution

Load Detail

Menu

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Distribution device identification number and load current. (F/CB/MISC 50-73 B#-P#A/B =

Fuse or Circuit Breaker or Bullet Device, Bay

Number-Distribution Device Position Number

[Group A or B Designation if applicable.])

Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to view other

Distribution Devices' load currents.

123

124

GO TO DISTRIBUTION

LOAD MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

Distribution

Load Detail

Menu

Distribution

Load Detail

Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-17

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802

Associated with ...

NLDB , 802

Definition

User Instructions

NLEB and 802 NL B

TOTAL PCU OUTPUT aaaaaA

or

TOTAL PCU/RECTIFIER aaaaaA

PCU B#-ID#/N# aaaaaA

RECTIFIER OUTPUT aaaaaA

GO TO MEASUREMENT

MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

TEMPERATURE SENSOR ttt C/F

GO TO FUNCTION MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

FLOAT MODE IS ACTIVE

SET TEST/EQ?

or

TEST/EQ MODE ACTIVE

SET FLOAT?

or

TEST/EQUALIZE INPUT

IS ACTIVE

or

TURN OFF POWER SHARE

or

TURN OFF ALTERNATE

CURRENT LIMIT

VIEW THE SYSTEM

INVENTORY

Total Rectifier Module (PCU) output current.

Press ENTER to view individual Rectifier

Module load currents. or

Measurement

Menu

Total Rectifier Module and legacy rectifier output current when LMS1000 Function

Channel #64 reported value is greater than zero.

Press ENTER to view individual Rectifier

Module load currents and legacy system current.

PCU

Load Menu

PCU

Load Menu

Rectifier Module (PCU) output current. (B#-

ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier Module MCA

ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier Modules in

System).

Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to view other

Rectifier Modules' load currents.

Legacy Rectifier System output current as reported by the LMS1000 Function Channel

#64.

PCU

Load Menu

PCU

Load Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Measurement

Menu

Temperature detected by Temperature Sensor, if installed.

Measurement

Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Measurement

Menu

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Function

Menu

Allows you to change the Rectifier Module

(PCU) output voltage mode.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter. or

The user tried to set Float Mode while an external test/equalize input signal was being supplied to the system.

Note: Test/Equalize Mode requires Power

Share and Alternate Current Limit to be turned off. A message is displayed if Power Share or

Alternate Current Limit is on. Turn Power

Share or Alternate Current Limit off first then return to this menu.

Function

Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

)

Page 2-18 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

Associated with ...

135

1 PCU IS

REPORTING

or

### PCUs ARE

REPORTING

or

NO PCUs ARE

INSTALLED

Inventory

Menu

136

137

138

139

140

141

142

143

144

145

PCU B#-ID#/N#

RATED aaaaaA

GO TO INVENTORY MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

B#-ID#/N# ASSY.

####################

B#-ID#/N# SERIAL

####################

B#-ID#/N# BOOT

####################

B#-ID#/N# SW VER

####################

PSC B#-ID# ASSEMBLY

####################

PSC B#-ID# SERIAL #

####################

PSC B#-ID# BOOTCODE

####################

Number of Rectifier Modules (PCUs) in MCA inventory.

Press ENTER to view individual Rectifier

Module inventory information. or

No Rectifier Modules installed.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Definition

PCU

Inventory

Menu

Rectifier Module (PCU) identification number and output current rating. (B#-ID#/N# = Bay

Number-Rectifier Module MCA ID# w/in

Bay/Number of Rectifier Modules in System).

Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to view other

Rectifier Modules.

PCU

Inventory

Menu

PCU

Inventory

Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

PCU

Inventory

Detail Menu

PCU

Inventory

Detail Menu

PCU

Inventory

Detail Menu

PCU

Inventory

Detail Menu

PCU

Inventory

Detail Menu

PCU

Inventory

Detail Menu

PCU

Inventory

Detail Menu

Rectifier Module (PCU) Assembly Number.

(B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier Module

MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier

Modules in System).

Rectifier Module (PCU) Serial Number. (B#-

ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier Module MCA

ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier Modules in

System).

Rectifier Module (PCU) Bootcode Number.

(B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier Module

MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier

Modules in System).

Rectifier Module (PCU) Software Number.

(B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier Module

MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier

Modules in System).

PSC (Primary Side Controller) Assembly

Number. (B#-ID# = Bay Number-PSC Position

Number).

PSC (Primary Side Controller) Serial Number.

(B#-ID# = Bay Number-PSC Position Number).

PSC (Primary Side Controller) Bootcode

Number. (B#-ID# = Bay Number-PSC Position

Number).

Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-19

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

146

PSC B#-ID# SOFTWARE

####################

147

148

149

150

151

152

153

GO TO PCU

INVENTORY

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

1 PCU POSITION

IS EMPTY

or

### PCU POSITIONS

ARE EMPTY

or

NO PCU POSITIONS

ARE EMPTY

1 DIST. PANEL IS

REPORTING

or

## DIST. PANELS ARE

REPORTING

or

NO DIST. PANELS ARE

INSTALLED

PANEL B#-P#A/B INCLUDES

1 POINT

or

PANEL B#-P#A/B INCLUDES

## POINTS

GO TO INVENTORY MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802

Associated with ...

Definition

PCU

Inventory

Detail Menu

PCU

Inventory

Detail Menu

PCU

Inventory

Detail Menu

PSC (Primary Side Controller) Software

Number. (B#-ID# = Bay Number-PSC Position

Number).

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Inventory

Menu

NLDB , 802

User Instructions

NLEB

Number of empty Rectifier Module (PCU) mounting positions in the system. and 802 NL B

Inventory

Menu

Distribution

Inventory

Menu

Number of Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit

Cards in MCA inventory.

Press ENTER to view individual Distribution

Bus Monitoring Circuit Card inventory information. or

No Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Cards installed.

Number of distribution devices this Distribution

Bus Monitoring Circuit Card is monitoring. (B#-

P#A/B = Bay Number-Distribution Bus

Monitoring Circuit Card Position Number

[Group A or B Designation if applicable.])

Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to view other

Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Cards' distribution devices.

Press ENTER to view individual distribution devices' inventory information.

Distribution

Inventory

Menu

Distribution

Inventory

Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

)

Page 2-20 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

Associated with ...

154

155

156

157

158

159

160

POINT B#-P#A/B IS A

F/CB/PI

PANEL B#-P#A/B ASSEMBLY

####################

PANEL B#-P#A/B SERIAL #

####################

PANEL B#-P#A/B BOOTCODE

####################

PANEL B#-P#A/B SOFTWARE

####################

GO TO DISTRIBUTION

INVENTORY

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Definition

Distribution

Inventory

Detail Menu

Distribution

Inventory

Detail Menu

Distribution

Inventory

Detail Menu

Distribution

Inventory

Detail Menu

Distribution

Inventory

Detail Menu

Distribution device identification number and type.

(B#-P#A/B = Bay Number-Distribution Device

Position Number [Group A or B Designation if applicable.])

(F/CB/PI = Fuse or Circuit Breaker or PlugIn)

Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to view other

Distribution Devices' inventory information.

Distribution Panel Assembly Number.

(B#-P#A/B = Bay Number-Distribution Bus

Monitoring Circuit Card Position Number

[Group A or B Designation if applicable.])

Distribution Panel Serial Number. (B#-P#A/B =

Bay Number-Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit

Card Position Number [Group A or B

Designation if applicable.])

Distribution Panel Bootcode Number.

(B#-P#A/B = Bay Number-Distribution Bus

Monitoring Circuit Card Position Number

[Group A or B Designation if applicable.])

Distribution Panel Software Number.

(B#-P#A/B = Bay Number-Distribution Bus

Monitoring Circuit Card Position Number

[Group A or B Designation if applicable.])

Distribution

Inventory

Detail Menu

Distribution

Inventory

Detail Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

161

1 I/O BOARD IS

REPORTING

or

## I/O BOARDS ARE

REPORTING

or

NO I/O BOARDS ARE

INSTALLED

Inventory

Menu

Number of MCA I/O Circuit Cards in MCA inventory.

Press ENTER to view individual MCA I/O

Circuit Card inventory information. or

No MCA I/O Circuit Cards installed.

162

I/O BOARD B#-P# IS

INSTALLED

I/O Board

Inventory

Menu

MCA I/O Circuit Card identification number.

(B#-P# = Bay Number-I/O Circuit Card Position

Number).

Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to view other

MCA I/O Circuit Cards' identification numbers.

163 GO TO INVENTORY MENU

I/O Board

Inventory

Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-21

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

164

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

165

166

BOARD B#-P# ASSEMBLY

####################

BOARD B#-P# SERIAL #

####################

167

168

169

170

171

BOARD B#-P# BOOTCODE

####################

BOARD B#-P# SOFTWARE

####################

GO TO I/O BOARD

INVENTORY

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

1 ROUTER IS

REPORTING

or

## ROUTERS ARE

REPORTING

or

NO ROUTERS ARE

INSTALLED

172

ROUTER B# IS

INSTALLED

173

174

175

176

GO TO INVENTORY MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

ROUTER B# ASSEMBLY

####################

ROUTER B# SERIAL #

####################

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Associated with ...

Definition

I/O Board

Inventory

Menu

I/O Board

Inventory

Detail Menu

I/O Board

Inventory

Detail Menu

I/O Board

Inventory

Detail Menu

I/O Board

Inventory

Detail Menu

I/O Board

Inventory

Detail Menu

I/O Board

Inventory

Detail Menu

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

MCA I/O Circuit Card Assembly Number.

(B#-P# = Bay Number-MCA I/O Circuit Card

Position Number).

MCA I/O Circuit Card Serial Number.

(B#-P# = Bay Number-MCA I/O Circuit Card

Position Number).

MCA I/O Circuit Card Bootcode Number.

(B#-P# = Bay Number-MCA I/O Circuit Card

Position Number).

MCA I/O Circuit Card Software Number.

(B#-P# = Bay Number-MCA I/O Circuit Card

Position Number).

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Inventory

Menu

Number of Router Circuit Cards in MCA inventory.

Press ENTER to view individual Router Circuit

Card inventory information. or

No Router Circuit Cards installed.

Router

Inventory

Menu

Router Circuit Card identification number. (B#

= Bay Number).

Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to view other

Router Circuit Cards' identification numbers.

Router

Inventory

Menu

Router

Inventory

Menu

Router

Inventory

Detail Menu

Router

Inventory

Detail Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Router Assembly Number.

(B# = Bay Number).

Router Serial Number.

(B# = Bay Number).

Page 2-22 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

Associated with ...

177

178

179

180

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

ROUTER B# BOOTCODE

####################

ROUTER B# SOFTWARE

####################

GO TO ROUTER

INVENTORY

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

1 RELAY BOARD IS

REPORTING

or

## RELAY BOARDS ARE

REPORTING

or

NO RELAY BOARDS ARE

INSTALLED

RELAY BOARD B#-P# IS

INSTALLED

GO TO INVENTORY MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

BOARD B#-P# ASSEMBLY

####################

BOARD B#-P# SERIAL #

####################

BOARD B#-P# BOOTCODE

####################

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Definition

Router

Inventory

Detail Menu

Router

Inventory

Detail Menu

Router

Inventory

Detail Menu

Router

Inventory

Detail Menu

Router Bootcode Number.

(B# = Bay Number).

Router Software Number.

(B# = Bay Number).

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Inventory

Menu

Relay

Inventory

Menu

Number of MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit

Cards in MCA inventory.

Press ENTER to view individual MCA

Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Card inventory information. or

No MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Cards installed.

MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Card identification number. (B#-P# = Bay Number-

Relay Circuit Card Position Number).

Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to view other

MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Cards' identification numbers.

Relay

Inventory

Menu

Relay

Inventory

Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Relay

Inventory

Detail Menu

Relay

Inventory

Detail Menu

Relay

Inventory

Detail Menu

MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Card

Assembly Number. (B#-P# = Bay

Number-MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit

Card Position Number).

MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Card Serial

Number. (B#-P# = Bay Number-MCA

Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Card Position

Number).

MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Card

Bootcode Number. (B#-P# = Bay

Number-MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit

Card Position Number).

Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-23

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

188

BOARD B#-P# SOFTWARE

####################

189

190

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

GO TO RELAY BOARD

INVENTORY

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

TEMPERATURE SENSOR

REPORTING

or

NO TEMPERATURE

SENSOR

MONITORING IS

REPORTING

or

NO MONITORING IS

INSTALLED

MONITORING ASSEMBLY

####################

MONITORING SERIAL #

####################

MONITORING BOOTCODE

####################

MONITORING SOFTWARE

####################

GO TO INVENTORY MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

SENSE VOLTAGE IS

REMOTE INPUT

or

SENSE VOLTAGE IS

AVERAGED

CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY

####################

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Associated with ...

Relay

Inventory

Detail Menu

MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Card

Software Number. (B#-P# = Bay Number-MCA

Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Card Position

Number).

Relay

Inventory

Detail Menu

Relay

Inventory

Detail Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Inventory

Menu

Temperature Sensor is in MCA inventory. or

No Temperature Sensor installed.

Inventory

Menu

Monitoring

Inventory

Detail Menu

Router

Inventory

Detail Menu

Monitoring

Inventory

Detail Menu

Monitoring

Inventory

Detail Menu

Monitoring

Inventory

Detail Menu

Monitoring

Inventory

Detail Menu

Inventory

Menu

Inventory

Menu

Definition

LMS1000 is communicating with the MCA. circuit card.

CPU circuit card. or

No LMS1000 installed in the MCA's inventory.

Specification number (Spec. No.) of the

LMS1000 Main CPU circuit card.

Serial number of the LMS1000 Main CPU

Software bootcode revision number of the

LMS1000 Main CPU circuit card.

Software version number of the LMS1000 Main

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Indicates if an external (remote) voltage input

(for MCA alarms and meter reading) is applied to the MCA / Router circuit card, or if the voltage input for MCA alarms and meter reading is the average of each bay's sense voltages (no external input applied).

Specification number (Spec. No.) of the

MCA/Router circuit card.

Page 2-24 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

Associated with ...

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

CONTROLLER SERIAL #

####################

CONTROLLER BOOTCODE

####################

CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

####################

DISPLAY ASSEMBLY

####################

DISPLAY SERIAL #

####################

DISPLAY BOOTCODE

####################

DISPLAY SOFTWARE

####################

208

209

210

211

212

213

214

GO TO INVENTORY MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

UPDATE THE INVENTORY

GO TO FUNCTION MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

ADJUST THE SYSTEM

VOLTS & AMPS

FLOAT SETPOINT

= vv.vvV

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Definition

Controller

Detail Menu

Controller

Detail Menu

Controller

Detail Menu

Controller

Detail Menu

Controller

Detail Menu

Controller

Detail Menu

Controller

Detail Menu

Controller

Detail Menu

Controller

Detail Menu

Inventory

Menu

Serial number of the MCA/Router circuit card.

Software bootcode version number of the

MCA/Router circuit card.

Software version number of the MCA/Router circuit card.

Specification number (Spec. No.) of the Display circuit card.

Serial number of the Display circuit card.

Software bootcode version number of the

Display circuit card.

Software version number of the Display circuit card.

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Allows resetting the inventory count when an inventory item is removed from the system by the user.

When an inventory item is removed from the system, an alarm will be reported until

"UPDATE THE INVENTORY" is entered.

Example, if a Rectifier Module (PCU) is removed from the system, the Rectifier

Module will not be removed from the

MCA's inventory until "UPDATE THE

INVENTORY" operation is completed.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Inventory

Menu

Inventory

Menu

Function

Menu

System

Adjustment

Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Press ENTER to go to the System Adjustment

Menu.

Allows you to change the Float Output Voltage set point.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-25

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

215

216

217

218

Message Displayed

TEST/EQUALIZE

= vv.vvV

POWER SHARE IS OFF

TURN IT ON?

or

POWER SHARE IS ON

TURN IT OFF?

or

ALT. LIMIT IS OFF

TURN IT ON?

or

ALT. LIMIT IS ON

TURN IT OFF?

or

TURN OFF POWER SHARE

or

TURN OFF ALTERNATE

CURRENT LIMIT

or

TURN OFF TEMPERATURE

COMPENSATION

PS INITIAL CAPACITY

LIMIT = ##%

PS VOLTAGE OFFSET

= v.vV

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802

User Instructions

NLEB and 802 NL B

Associated with ...

Definition

System

Adjustment

Menu

Allows you to change the Test/Equalize Output

Voltage set point.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

System

Adjustment

Menu

Allows you to enable or disable the Power

Share or Alternate Current Limit feature.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter. or

The Power Share feature requires

Temperature Compensation and Alternate

Current Limit to be turned off. The Alternate

Current Limit feature requires Temperature

Compensation and Power Share to be turned off. A message is displayed if Temperature

Compensation, Power Share, or Alternate

Current Limit is on. Turn the feature off first, then return to this menu to enable Power Share or Alternate Current Limit.

System

Adjustment

Menu

System

Adjustment

Menu

Enter the percentage value of the total capacity of THIS Power System that will initially feed the load. This value must be set to ensure that the current delivered by THIS Power System is lower than the total load current from the two

DC power systems.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Enter the value that will be added to the float voltage to ensure THIS Power System will initially carry the load. This value must be higher than the sum of the voltage drop in the cables connecting the two systems in parallel and the output voltage regulation specific to the rectifiers of the existing DC power system. If the sense leads are connected to the same sensing points as the existing DC power system, the Voltage Offset should take into consideration the output voltage regulation only.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

)

Page 2-26 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

Associated with ...

218A

219

220

221

222

ALTERNATE CURRENT LIMIT

= ##%

HI VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN

= vv.vvV

TEST H.V. SHUTDOWN

= vv.vvV

LOSS IS POSSIBLE. GO

AHEAD ANYWAY?

PCU CURRENT LIMIT

= aaaaaA

or

PCU CURRENT LIMIT

= aaaaaMAX

or

PCU CURRENT LIMIT

POWER SHARE

or

PCU CURRENT LIMIT

ALT. LIMIT

100% PCU CURRENT IS aaaaaA

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Definition

System

Adjustment

Menu

System

Adjustment

Menu

System

Adjustment

Menu

System

Adjustment

Menu

System

Adjustment

Menu

Enter the percentage value of the rated rectifier output capacity to which the rectifier output current should be limited.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Allows you to change the High Voltage

Shutdown set point.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Allows you to temporarily change the High

Voltage Shutdown set point to another value

(such as system voltage) to test the high voltage shutdown circuits.

1. Press ENTER and ALARM CUTOFF

(at the same time).

2. Press YES / + / i or NO / - to increment or decrement, respectively, the High

Voltage Shutdown value displayed.

3. A WARNING appears. Press ENTER and ALARM CUTOFF (at the same time) if you wish to proceed. This immediately changes the HVS setting.

The HVS setting reverts back to its previous setting by pressing ENTER, or simultaneously pressing YES / + / i and NO / -.

Allows you to change the Current Limit set point. aaaaaA = System current limit setting, current limit circuit on all Rectifier Modules are automatically adjusted to ensure system current does not exceed this value. aaaaaMAX

= System current limit setting is set to the sum of the maximum current capacities of all

Rectifier Modules installed in the system.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Note: When Power Share is enabled, current limit is controlled by the Power Share feature.

Note: When Alternate Current Limit is enabled and active, current limit is controlled by the

Alternate Current Limit feature.

This value is only displayed. MCA calculates the value from all Rectifier Modules (PCUs) installed. There is no user adjustment.

Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-27

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

223 GO TO FUNCTION MENU

224

225

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

ADJUST THE ALARM

SETPOINTS

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

SYSTEM HI VOLTAGE #1

= vv.vvV

SYSTEM HI VOLTAGE #2

= vv.vvV

BATTERY ON DISCHARGE

= vv.vvV

VERY LOW VOLTAGE

= vv.vvV

TOTAL LOAD CURRENT

= aaaaaA

DISTRIBUTION GROUP A

= aaaaaA

DISTRIBUTION GROUP B

= aaaaaA

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Associated with ...

Definition

System

Adjustment

Menu

System

Adjustment

Menu

Function

Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Alarm

Adjustment

Menu

Alarm

Adjustment

Menu

Alarm

Adjustment

Menu

Alarm

Adjustment

Menu

Alarm

Adjustment

Menu

Alarm

Adjustment

Menu

Alarm

Adjustment

Menu

Press ENTER to go to the Alarm Adjustment

Menu.

Allows you to change the System High Voltage

#1 Alarm set point.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Allows you to change the System High Voltage

#2 Alarm set point.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Allows you to change the Battery on Discharge

Alarm set point.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Allows you to change the Very Low Voltage

Alarm set point.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Allows you to change the Total Load Current

Alarm set point.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Allows you to change the Distribution Group A

Load Current Alarm set point.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Allows you to change the Distribution Group B

Load Current Alarm set point.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Page 2-28 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

Associated with ...

233

234

235

236

237

HIGH TEMPERATURE #1

= ttt C/F

or

NO HIGH TEMPERATURE

#1 ALARM

HIGH TEMPERATURE #2

= ttt C/F

or

NO HIGH TEMPERATURE

#2 ALARM

LOW TEMPERATURE #1

= ttt C/F

or

NO LOW TEMPERATURE

#1 ALARM

LOW TEMPERATURE #2

= ttt C/F

or

NO LOW TEMPERATURE

#2 ALARM

GO TO FUNCTION MENU

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Definition

Alarm

Adjustment

Menu

Alarm

Adjustment

Menu

Alarm

Adjustment

Menu

Alarm

Adjustment

Menu

Allows you to change the High Temperature #1

Alarm set point, or disable the alarm.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Note: To disable the feature, press

YES / + / i when in the change setting mode to scroll to NO HIGH

TEMPERATURE #1 ALARM

(displayed when you scroll up to

"100 C").

Allows you to change the High Temperature #2

Alarm set point, or disable the alarm.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Note: To disable the feature, press

YES / + / i when in the change setting mode to scroll to NO HIGH

TEMPERATURE #2 ALARM

(displayed when you scroll up to

"100 C").

Allows you to change the Low Temperature #1

Alarm set point, or disable the alarm.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or

Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Note: To disable the feature, press

NO / - when in the change setting mode to scroll to NO LOW

TEMPERATURE #1 ALARM

(displayed when you scroll down to

"-50 C").

Allows you to change the Low Temperature #2

Alarm set point, or disable the alarm.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Note: To disable the feature, press

NO / - when in the change setting mode to scroll to NO LOW

TEMPERATURE #2 ALARM

(displayed when you scroll down to

"-50 C").

Alarm

Adjustment

Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-29

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

238

239

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

TURN PCUs ON OR OFF

or

ENERGY MANAGEMENT IS

IN CONTROL

240

241

242

243

244

PCU B#-ID#/N# ON

TURN IT OFF?

or

PCU B#-ID#/N# OFF

TURN IT ON?

or

ENERGY MANAGEMENT

IN CONTROL

GO TO FUNCTION MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

CHANGE CONFIGURATION

PARAMETERS

CHANGE I/O BOARD

PARAMETERS

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Associated with ...

Alarm

Adjustment

Menu

Function

Menu

Definition

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Press ENTER to go to the Rectifier Module

(PCU) Enable Menu.

PCU

Enable Menu

Allows you to turn a Rectifier Module (PCU)

ON or OFF (Local TR inhibit feature).

1. Press the UP and DOWN ARROWS to navigate to the Rectifier Module to turn

ON or OFF (B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-

Rectifier Module MCA ID# w/in

Bay/Number of Rectifier Modules in

System).

2. Press ENTER and ALARM CUTOFF

(at the same time) to change the TR setting for this Rectifier Module.

3. At the "ARE YOU SURE?" prompt, press either YES / + / i to accept the new setting, or NO / - to cancel this operation without changing the existing setting.

Note: Rectifier Modules cannot be turned on or off if energy management is active.

PCU

Enable Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

PCU

Enable Menu

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Function

Menu

Press ENTER to go to the Configure Menu.

Configure

Menu

Allows you to change the MCA I/O circuit card(s) configurable parameters.

Press ENTER to configure the MCA I/O circuit cards.

Page 2-30 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

Associated with ...

245

246

247

ANALOG INPUT B#-P# IS

DISTRIBUTION

or

ANALOG INPUT B#-P# IS

AUXILIARY

ANALOG INPUT B#-P#

50mV = aaaaaA

ANALOG OUTPUT B#-P#

50mV = aaaaaA

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Definition

I/O Board

Configuration

Menu

Select the MCA I/O circuit card to be configured, and designate the analog input for this MCA I/O circuit card as "Distribution" or

"Auxiliary". The MCA displays the AUXILIARY load currents in a separate menu, the

DISTRIBUTION load currents are added to the

Distribution Menus.

1. Press the UP and DOWN ARROWS to navigate to the MCA I/O circuit card to configure (B#-P# = Bay Number-MCA

I/O Circuit Card Position Number).

2. Press ENTER and ALARM CUTOFF

(at the same time) to change the setting for this MCA I/O circuit card.

3. At the "ARE YOU SURE?" prompt, press either YES / + / i to accept the new setting, or NO / - to cancel this operation without changing the existing setting.

I/O Board

Configuration

Menu

Select the MCA I/O circuit card to be configured, and set the scale factor for the analog input on this MCA I/O circuit card.

1. Press the UP and DOWN ARROWS to navigate to the MCA I/O circuit card to configure (B#-P# = Bay Number-MCA

I/O Circuit Card Position Number).

2. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this document to complete the operation.

I/O Board

Configuration

Menu

Select the MCA I/O circuit card to be configured, and set the scale factor for the analog output on this MCA I/O circuit card.

1. Press the UP and DOWN ARROWS to navigate to the MCA I/O circuit card to configure (B#-P# = Bay Number-MCA

I/O Circuit Card Position Number).

2. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this document to complete the operation.

Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-31

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

248

249

250

251

252

Message Displayed

BINARY INPUT B#-P#-I#

ALARM = CLOSED

or

BINARY INPUT B#-P#-I#

ALARM = OPEN

GO TO CONFIGURE MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

AUDIBLE SILENT TIME

= mm MINUTES

or

AUDIBLE ALARMS STAY

SILENCED

PCU SEQUENCING IS

DISABLED

or

PCU SEQUENCING DELAY

= ss SECONDS

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802

User Instructions

NLEB and 802 NL B

Associated with ...

Definition

I/O Board

Configuration

Menu

Select the MCA I/O circuit card to be configured, and set the alarm state for each binary input on this MCA I/O circuit card.

1. Press the UP and DOWN ARROWS to navigate to the MCA I/O circuit card and binary input to configure (B#-P#-I#

= Bay Number-MCA I/O Circuit Card

Position Number-Binary Input

Number).

2. Press ENTER and ALARM CUTOFF

(at the same time) to change the setting for this MCA I/O circuit card.

3. At the "ARE YOU SURE?" prompt, press either YES / + / i to accept the new setting, or NO / - to cancel this operation without changing the existing setting.

I/O Board

Configuration

Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

I/O Board

Configuration

Menu

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Configure

Menu

Allows you to enable the MCA Audible Alarm feature and set the Audible Alarm Cutoff Reset

Time Period set point, or disable the feature.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Note: To disable the feature, press

NO / - when in the change setting mode to scroll to AUDIBLE ALARMS

STAY SILENCED (displayed when you scroll down to "zero minutes").

Configure

Menu

Allows you to enable the Rectifier Module

(PCU) Sequencing feature and set the Rectifier

Module (PCU) Sequencing Delay set point, or disable the feature.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Note: To disable the feature, press

NO / - when in the change setting mode to scroll to Rectifier

SEQUENCING IS DISABLED

(displayed when you scroll down to

"zero seconds").

)

Page 2-32 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

Associated with ...

253

TEST EQUALIZE IS DISABLED

or

MANUAL TEST/EQUALIZE

= hh HOURS

or

TEST/EQUALIZE STOP

IS MANUAL

or

END TEST/EQUALIZE IN hh.hh HOURS

or

TURN OFF POWER SHARE

or

TURN OFF ALTERNATE

CURRENT LIMIT

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Definition

Configure

Menu

Allows you to enable the Manual Timed

Test/Equalize feature and set the Timed

Test/Equalize set point, or disable the feature.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Note: To disable the feature, press

NO / - when in the change setting mode to scroll to TEST/EQUALIZE

STOP IS MANUAL (displayed when you scroll down to "zero hours"). This indicates the manually initiated timed test/equalize feature is disabled and the system must be manually returned to the float mode if placed in the test/equalize mode. or

If manually initiated timed test/equalize feature is enabled and the system is placed in the test/equalize mode (via the MCA interface), remaining test/equalize time is displayed.

Note: When TEST/EQUALIZE STOP IS

MANUAL or END TEST/EQUALIZE IN hhh.hh

HOURS is being displayed, press and release

ENTER and ALARM CUTOFF simultaneously to change the MANUAL TEST/EQUALIZE = hh

HOURS setting. or

When the Power Share or Alternate Current

Limit feature is enabled, the system cannot be placed in the Test/Equalize mode.

Note: Test/Equalize Mode requires Power

Share and Alternate Current Limit to be turned off. A message is displayed if Power Share or

Alternate Current Limit is on. Turn Power

Share or Alternate Current Limit off first then return to this menu.

Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-33

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

254

255

256

257

258

Message Displayed

AUTO EQUALIZE IS

DISABLED

or

AUTO EQUALIZE FOR ## x DISCHARGE

or

END AUTO EQUALIZE IN hhh.hh HOURS

or

TURN OFF POWER SHARE

or

TURN OFF ALTERNATE

CURRENT LIMIT

DEFINE RELAY

FUNCTIONS

DEFINE RELAY

FUNCTION A#

GO TO CONFIGURE MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802

User Instructions

NLEB and 802 NL B

Associated with ...

Definition

Configure

Menu

Configure

Menu

Relay

Function

Menu

Allows you to enable the Auto Test/Equalize feature and set the Auto Test/Equalize

Multiplier set point, or disable the feature.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Note: To disable the feature, press

NO / - when in the change setting mode to scroll to AUTO EQUALIZE IS

DISABLED (displayed when you scroll down to "zero x discharge"). or

Displays remaining auto test/equalize time if an auto test/equalize is in process. or

When the Power Share or Alternate Current

Limit feature is enabled, the system cannot be placed in the Test/Equalize mode.

Note: Test/Equalize Mode requires Power

Share and Alternate Current Limit to be turned off. A message is displayed if Power Share or

Alternate Current Limit is on. Turn Power

Share or Alternate Current Limit off first then return to this menu.

Allows you to define a Relay Function Channel by assigning alarm conditions to a specific

Relay Function Channel.

Press ENTER to define relay functions.

Select the Relay Function Channel to be defined.

1. Press the UP and DOWN ARROWS to navigate to the desired Relay Function

Channel. (A# = Relay Function

Channel Number.)

2. Press ENTER to define the selected

Relay Function Channel.

Note: See the table in Section 5876

(Installation Instructions) for the MCA default configuration.

Relay

Function

Menu

Relay

Function

Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

)

Page 2-34 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

Associated with ...

259

260

261

261A

262

263

CHECKED CONDITIONS

DE-ENERGIZE

ENERGIZE

SYSTEM VOLTAGE IS

VERY LOW

SYSTEM VOLTAGE IS

VERY LOW or

SYSTEM BATTERY ON

DISCHARGE or

SYSTEM BATTERY ON

DISCHARGE or

CHECKED CONDITIONS

EMERGENCY STOP

INPUT ACTIVE or

EMERGENCY STOP

INPUT ACTIVE

HI VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN

INPUT ACTIVE or

HI VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN

INPUT ACTIVE

ALTERNATE CURRENT

LIMIT ACTIVE

ALTERNATE CURRENT

LIMIT ACTIVE or

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Definition

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Select whether the relay(s) assigned to this

Relay Function Channel will energize or deenergize for any condition checked

(selected) below.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-35

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

264

SYSTEM HIGH VOLTAGE

#1 ALARM or

SYSTEM HIGH VOLTAGE

#1 ALARM

265

266

267

268

269

SYSTEM HIGH VOLTAGE

#2 ALARM

SYSTEM HIGH VOLTAGE

#2 ALARM

1 SYSTEM BREAKER OR

FUSE ALARM

1 SYSTEM BREAKER OR

FUSE ALARM or or

2+ SYSTEM BREAKER &

FUSE ALARMS or

2+ SYSTEM BREAKER &

FUSE ALARMS

AC POWER IS OFF TO

1 PCU

1 PCU or

AC POWER IS OFF TO

AC POWER IS OFF TO

2+ PCUs

AC POWER IS OFF TO

2+ PCUs or

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Associated with ...

Definition

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Page 2-36 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

Associated with ...

270

271

272

273

274

AC POWER IS OFF TO

ALL PCUs

AC POWER IS OFF TO

ALL PCUs

1 PCU FAILURE

ANY TYPE or

1 PCU FAILURE

ANY TYPE

2+ PCU FAILURES

ANY TYPE

2+ PCU FAILURES

ANY TYPE or or

1 PCU FAILURE

'MAJOR' TYPE or

1 PCU FAILURE

'MAJOR' TYPE

2+ PCU FAILURES

'MAJOR' TYPE or

2+ PCU FAILURES

'MAJOR' TYPE

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Definition

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Note: Thermal Current Limit, 1 Fan Failure,

High Ambient Temperature, and Sense Loss are 'Minor' alarm conditions. All other Rectifier

Module alarms are 'Major' alarm conditions.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Note: Thermal Current Limit, 1 Fan Failure,

High Ambient Temperature, and Sense Loss are 'Minor' alarm conditions. All other Rectifier

Module alarms are 'Major' alarm conditions.

Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-37

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

275

276

277

278

279

1 PCU FAILURE

'MINOR' TYPE or

1 PCU FAILURE

'MINOR' TYPE

2+ PCU FAILURES

'MINOR' TYPE or

2+ PCU FAILURES

'MINOR' TYPE

NO PCUs ARE

IN INVENTORY or

NO PCUs ARE

IN INVENTORY

1 DIST. PANEL

FAILURE or

1 DIST. PANEL

FAILURE

2+ DIST. PANEL

FAILURES or

2+ DIST. PANEL

FAILURES

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Associated with ...

Definition

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Note: Thermal Current Limit, 1 Fan Failure,

High Ambient Temperature, and Sense Loss are 'Minor' alarm conditions. All other Rectifier

Module alarms are 'Major' alarm conditions.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Note: Thermal Current Limit, 1 Fan Failure,

High Ambient Temperature, and Sense Loss are 'Minor' alarm conditions. All other Rectifier

Module alarms are 'Major' alarm conditions.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Page 2-38 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

Associated with ...

280

281

282

283

284

285

NO DIST. PANELS

IN INVENTORY

NO DIST. PANELS

IN INVENTORY

1 I/O BOARD

FAILURE

1 I/O BOARD

FAILURE

FAILURES

FAILURES or or

2+ I/O BOARD or

2+ I/O BOARD

NO I/O BOARDS ARE

IN INVENTORY or

NO I/O BOARDS ARE

IN INVENTORY

1 ROUTER FAILURE or

1 ROUTER FAILURE

2+ ROUTER FAILURES or

2+ ROUTER FAILURES

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Definition

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-39

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

286

287

288

289

290

291

Message Displayed

NO ROUTERS ARE

IN INVENTORY or

NO ROUTERS ARE

IN INVENTORY

1 RELAY BOARD

FAILURE

1 RELAY BOARD

FAILURE

2+ RELAY BOARD

FAILURES

2+ RELAY BOARD

FAILURES

ALARM

HIGH TEMPERATURE #1

ALARM

ALARM

ALARM or or

NO RELAY BOARDS ARE

IN INVENTORY or

NO RELAY BOARDS ARE

IN INVENTORY

HIGH TEMPERATURE #1 or

HIGH TEMPERATURE #2 or

HIGH TEMPERATURE #2

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802

User Instructions

NLEB and 802 NL B

Associated with ...

Definition

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

)

Page 2-40 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

Associated with ...

292

293

294

295

LOW TEMPERATURE #1

ALARM

LOW TEMPERATURE #1

ALARM

ALARM

ALARM or

LOW TEMPERATURE #2 or

LOW TEMPERATURE #2

TEMPERATURE SENSOR

NO SIGNAL

TEMPERATURE SENSOR

NO SIGNAL or

MAJOR MONITORING

ALARM(S)

MAJOR MONITORING

ALARM(S) or

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Definition

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Note: If any of these LMS1000 conditions are selected to contribute to an MCA alarm, the

User must ensure that the LMS1000 is programmed so that the MCA does not contribute to the LMS1000 condition.

Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-41

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

296

297

298

299

Message Displayed

MINOR MONITORING

ALARM(S)

ALARM(S) or

MINOR MONITORING

All Monitoring LED

Messages

Messages or

All Monitoring LED

MONITORING DOES NOT

RESPOND or

MONITORING DOES NOT

RESPOND

CONTROLLER FAILURE or

CONTROLLER FAILURE

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802

User Instructions

NLEB and 802 NL B

Associated with ...

Definition

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Note: If any of these LMS1000 conditions are selected to contribute to an MCA alarm, the

User must ensure that the LMS1000 is programmed so that the MCA does not contribute to the LMS1000 condition.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Note: If any of these LMS1000 conditions are selected to contribute to an MCA alarm, the

User must ensure that the LMS1000 is programmed so that the MCA does not contribute to the LMS1000 condition.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

)

Page 2-42 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

Associated with ...

300

301

302

303

304

305

THE CONTROLLER IS

INITIALIZING

THE CONTROLLER IS

INITIALIZING

TOTAL LOAD CURRENT

ALARM

LOAD ALARM

DIST. GROUP B

LOAD ALARM or

TOTAL LOAD CURRENT

ALARM

DIST. GROUP A

LOAD ALARM

DIST. GROUP A

LOAD ALARM or or

 DIST. GROUP B or

THE DISPLAY DOES

NOT RESPOND or

THE DISPLAY DOES

NOT RESPOND

TEST/EQUALIZE MODE

IS ACTIVE

TEST/EQUALIZE MODE

IS ACTIVE or

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Definition

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-43

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

306

307

308

309

Message Displayed

THE AUDIBLE ALARM

IS ACTIVE or

THE AUDIBLE ALARM

IS ACTIVE

AUDIBLE ALARMS ARE

SILENCED

MENU or

AUDIBLE ALARMS ARE

SILENCED

GO TO RELAY FUNCTION

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802

User Instructions

NLEB and 802 NL B

Associated with ...

Definition

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

This condition is selected when the 

(checkmark) symbol is displayed.

This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the  (checkmark) symbol.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Relay

Function

Definition

Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

)

Page 2-44 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

Associated with ...

310

311

312

START RELAY FUNCTION

TEST

or

TIME PER FUNCTION

= hh:mm:ss

or

TIME PER FUNCTION

NO TIMEOUT

or

AUTOMATICALLY TEST

ALL FUNCTIONS

or

TEST RELAY FUNCTION

A#

or

STOP RELAY FUNCTION

TEST

or

TESTING FUNCTION A#

= hh:mm:ss

or

TESTING FUNCTION A#

NO TIMEOUT

ASSIGN RELAYS TO

FUNCTIONS

ASSIGN RELAY B#-P#-R#

FUNCTION A#

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Definition

Configure

Menu

Configure

Menu

Relay

Assignment

Menu

Set, activate, monitor, or stop the progress of the MCA Customer Alarm Relay Test Feature.

1. With START RELAY FUNCTION TEST being displayed, press ENTER and

ALARM CUTOFF (at the same time).

2. Press the UP and DOWN ARROWS to select a time period for each Relay

Function Channel test or select NO

TIMEOUT.

3. Press ENTER.

4. Press the UP and DOWN ARROWS to select either AUTOMATICALY TEST

ALL FUNCTIONS (to test all relay function channels), or TEST RELAY

FUNCTION A# (to test an individual relay function channel).

5. Press ENTER.

6. To start the Relay Function Test; press the UP ARROW, to cancel press the

DOWN ARROW.

7. The Relay Function being tested and the remaining time are displayed.

8. To terminate the test, press ENTER and ALARM CUTOFF (at the same time) until STOP RELAY FUNCTION

TEST is displayed.

9. To stop the test, press UP ARROW.

To keep the test running, press DOWN

ARROW.

10. At the "ARE YOU SURE?" prompt, press YES / + / i.

Allows you to configure a relay by assigning a

Relay Function Channel to a specific relay.

Press ENTER to assign relays to functions.

Select the MCA Customer Alarm Relay to be configured, and assign a relay function channel to this relay.

1. Press the UP and DOWN ARROWS to navigate to the desired relay.

(B#-P#-R# = Bay Number-MCA

Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Card

Position Number-Relay Number).

2. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this document to complete the operation.

Note: See the table in Section 5876

(Installation Instructions) for the MCA default configuration.

Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-45

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

313

314

315

316

317

318

319

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802

Associated with ...

NLDB , 802

Definition

User Instructions

NLEB and 802 NL B

GO TO CONFIGURE MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

NO TEMPERATURE

COMPENSATION

or

TEMPERATURE SLOPE

= 0.vvvV/ C/F

or

TURN OFF POWER SHARE

or

TURN OFF ALTERNATE

CURRENT LIMIT

MAXIMUM COMPENSATION

= vv.vvV

MINIMUM COMPENSATION

= vv.vvV

NOW DISPLAYING C/F

SET TO C/F?

IT IS NOW hh:mm:ss dd-mon-yy

Relay

Assignment

Menu

Relay

Assignment

Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Configure

Menu

Configure

Menu

Configure

Menu

Configure

Menu

Configure

Menu

Allows you to enable the Battery Charge

Temperature Compensation feature and set the Battery Charge Temperature

Compensation Slope set point, or disable the feature.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Note: To disable the feature, press

NO / - when in the change setting mode to scroll to NO TEMPERATURE

COMPENSATION (displayed when you scroll down to "0V/ C").

Note: This is the voltage slope of the entire battery string, not individual cells.

Note: The Temperature Compensation feature requires Power Share and Alternate Current

Limit to be turned off. A message is displayed if Power Share or Alternate Current Limit is on.

Turn Power Share or Alternate Current Limit off first then return to this menu to enable

Temperature Compensation.

Allows you to change the Maximum Voltage with Temperature Compensation set point.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Allows you to change the Minimum Voltage with Temperature Compensation set point.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Allows you to change the temperature unit

(degrees F or degrees C).

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Allows you to change the time and time.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

)

Page 2-46 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

Associated with ...

320

320A

320B

320C

320D

320E

320F

320G

320H

ERASE THE ALARM LOG

CHANGE NETWORK

ADDRESSES

##.##.##.##.##.##

MAC ADDRESS

###.###.###.###

IP ADDRESS

###.###.###.###

NET MASK ADDRESS

###.###.###.###

GATEWAY ADDRESS

VALIDATE THE ADDRESS

CHANGES?

or

UPDATE/RESTART LMS

WITH CHANGES?

or

THE CHANGES WERE

REJECTED

GO TO CONFIGURE MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Definition

Configure

Menu

Configure

Menu

Network

Address

Menu

Deletes all MCA Alarm Log entries.

1. Refer to "Changing a Control Function" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Allows you to view and change the network IP, gateway, and netmask addresses used by the

LMS1000 when connecting to the network.

Displays the Ethernet (MAC) address used by the LMS1000 when connecting to the network.

Note: This address cannot be changed, only viewed.

Allows you to change the IP address used by the LMS1000 when connecting to the network.

Network

Address

Menu

Network

Address

Menu

Network

Address

Menu

Network

Address

Menu

Allows you to change the netmask address used by the LMS1000 when connecting to the network.

Allows you to change the gateway address used by the LMS1000 when connecting to the network.

This allows you to save the address changes that were made. The system must first verify that the new IP, netmask, and gateway addresses are compatible with each other. or

This allows you to pass the saved addresses to the LMS1000.

Note: The LMS1000 will need to be restarted for the address changes to take effect. or

The new IP, netmask, and gateway addresses are not compatible with each other. The changes are not accepted.

Network

Address

Menu

Network

Address

Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

321

321A

321B

321C

321D

321E

NO FUNCTION IN THIS SYSTEM

NO FUNCTION IN THIS SYSTEM

NO FUNCTION IN THIS SYSTEM

NO FUNCTION IN THIS SYSTEM

NO FUNCTION IN THIS SYSTEM

NO FUNCTION IN THIS SYSTEM

Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-47

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

321F

321G

322

322A

323

324

325

326

327

328

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802

Associated with ...

NLDB , 802

Definition

User Instructions

NLEB and 802 NL B

NO FUNCTION IN THIS SYSTEM

NO FUNCTION IN THIS SYSTEM

GO TO FUNCTION MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

VERIFY TEST, ESTOP,

& HVS INPUTS

or

TEST SHUTDOWN INPUT

IS ON

or

EMERGENCY STOP INPUT

IS ON

or

HI VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN

INPUT IS ON

VIEW THE ALARM LOG dd-mon-yy hh:mm:ss

CONTROLLER or dd-mon-yy hh:mm:ss

CONTROLLER

SYSTEM CONTROLLER

NO ALARMS

EMERGENCY STOP

INPUT ACTIVE

HI VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN

INPUT ACTIVE

Configure

Menu

Configure

Menu

Function

Menu

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Allows you to verify the test, emergency stop, and high voltage shutdown inputs.

1. Navigate to this menu item.

2. Apply the Test input. Verify MCA displays TEST SHUTDOWN INPUT IS

ON.

3. With the Test input still applied, apply the Emergency Stop input. Verify MCA displays EMERGENCY STOP INPUT

IS ON. Release the Emergency Stop input.

4. With the Test input still applied, apply the High Voltage Shutdown input.

Verify MCA displays HI VOLTAGE

SHUTDOWN INPUT IS ON. Release the High Voltage Shutdown input.

5. Release the Test input.

Function

Menu

Press ENTER to view the MCA Alarm Log.

Alarm Log

Menu

Displays the alarms (with date and time stamp) recorded for the Controller element of the system. Note that the recordable alarm conditions are set by configuring MCA

Relay Function Channel #24. The factory

defaults are shown in this chart.

Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to scroll if multiple alarms are recorded.

A 'music note' ( ♪) after the date/time stamp indicates the alarm went active. A 'checkmark'

() indicates the alarm retired.

MCA

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

MCA

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

MCA

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Recordable MCA (Controller) event.

Recordable MCA (Controller) event.

Recordable MCA (Controller) event.

)

Page 2-48 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

Associated with ...

328A

329

330

331

332

333

334

335

336

337

338

339

340

341

342

ALTERNATE CURRENT

LIMIT ACTIVE

SYSTEM VOLTAGE IS

VERY LOW

SYSTEM BATTERY IS ON

DISCHARGE

SYSTEM HIGH VOLTAGE

#1 ALARM

SYSTEM HIGH VOLTAGE

#2 ALARM

NO PCUs ARE

IN INVENTORY

NO DIST. PANELS ARE

IN INVENTORY

NO ROUTERS ARE

IN INVENTORY

NO RELAY BOARDS ARE

IN INVENTORY

HIGH TEMPERATURE #1

ALARM

HIGH TEMPERATURE #2

ALARM

LOW TEMPERATURE #1

ALARM

LOW TEMPERATURE #2

ALARM

TEMPERATURE SENSOR

NO SIGNAL

MAJOR MONITORING

ALARM(S)

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Definition

MCA

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

MCA

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

MCA

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

MCA

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

MCA

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

MCA

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

MCA

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

MCA

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

MCA

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

MCA

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

MCA

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

MCA

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

MCA

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

MCA

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

MCA

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Recordable MCA (Controller) event.

Recordable MCA (Controller) event.

Recordable MCA (Controller) event.

Recordable MCA (Controller) event.

Recordable MCA (Controller) event.

Recordable MCA (Controller) event.

Recordable MCA (Controller) event.

Recordable MCA (Controller) event.

Recordable MCA (Controller) event.

Recordable MCA (Controller) event.

Recordable MCA (Controller) event.

Recordable MCA (Controller) event.

Recordable MCA (Controller) event.

Recordable MCA (Controller) event.

Recordable MCA (Controller) event.

Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-49

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

343

MINOR MONITORING

ALARM(S)

344

Monitoring LED

Messages

345

346

MONITORING DOES NOT

RESPOND

CONTROLLER FAILURE

####

347

348

349

350

THE CONTROLLER IS

INITIALIZING

TOTAL LOAD CURRENT

ALARM

GROUP A LOAD CURRENT

ALARM

GROUP B LOAD CURRENT

ALARM

351

352

353

THE DISPLAY DOES NOT

RESPOND

SYSTEM OUTPUT SENSE vv.vvV

TOTAL LOAD CURRENT aaaaaA

354

355

356

GO TO ALARM LOG MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING dd-mon-yy hh:mm:ss

B#-SN# or

♪ dd-mon-yy hh:mm:ss

B#-SN#

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Associated with ...

Definition

MCA

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

MCA

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

MCA

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

MCA

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

MCA

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

MCA

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

MCA

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

MCA

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

MCA

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

MCA

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

MCA

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

MCA

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

MCA

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Recordable MCA (Controller) event.

Recordable MCA (Controller) event.

Recordable MCA (Controller) event.

Recordable MCA (Controller) event.

Recordable MCA (Controller) event.

Recordable MCA (Controller) event.

Recordable MCA (Controller) event.

Recordable MCA (Controller) event.

Recordable MCA (Controller) event.

Recordable System Data.

Recordable System Data.

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Alarm Log

Menu

Displays the alarms (with date and time stamp) recorded for the Rectifier element of the system.

Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to scroll if multiple alarms are recorded.

A 'music note' ( ♪) after the date/time stamp indicates the alarm went active. A 'checkmark'

() indicates the alarm retired.

Page 2-50 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

Associated with ...

357

358

359

360

361

362

363

364

365

366

367

368

369

370

371

PCU B#-SN#

NO ALARMS

PCU B#-SN#

EMERG. STOP

PCU B#-SN#

H.V. SHUTDOWN

PCU B#-SN#

AC LINE OFF

PCU B#-SN#

AC LINE LOW

PCU B#-SN#

AC LINE HIGH

PCU B#-SN#

AC PHASE LOST

PCU B#-SN#

POWER FACTOR

PCU B#-SN#

DC/DC CONV.

PCU B#-SN#

FUSE/BREAKER

PCU B#-SN#

INHIBITED

PCU B#-SN#

ON STANDBY

PCU B#-SN#

THERMAL LIMIT

PCU B#-SN#

THERMAL STOP

PCU B#-SN#

HIGH AMBIENT

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Definition

PCU

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

PCU

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

PCU

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

PCU

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

PCU

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

PCU

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

PCU

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

PCU

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

PCU

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

PCU

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

PCU

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

PCU

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

PCU

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

PCU

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

PCU

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.

Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.

Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.

Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.

Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.

Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.

Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.

Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.

Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.

Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.

Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.

Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.

Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.

Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.

Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.

Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-51

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

372

PCU B#-SN#

LOAD SHARE

373

374

PCU B#-SN#

1 FAN SPEED

PCU B#-SN#

2+ FANS SPEED

375

376

377

378

379

380

381

PCU B#-SN#

NO VOLT SENSE

PCU B#-SN#

DUPLICATED

PCU B#-SN#

NO RESPONSE

PCU B#-SN#

TURNED ON

PCU B#-SN#

TURNED OFF or

PCU B#-SN# aaaaaA

SYSTEM OUTPUT SENSE vv.vvV

TOTAL LOAD CURRENT aaaaaA

382 GO TO ALARM LOG MENU

383

384

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING dd-mon-yy hh:mm:ss

PANEL B#-P#A/B or

♪ dd-mon-yy hh:mm:ss

PANEL B#-P#A/B

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Associated with ...

Definition

PCU

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

PCU

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

PCU

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

PCU

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

PCU

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

PCU

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.

Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.

Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.

Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.

Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.

Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.

PCU

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) Data.

PCU

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

PCU

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

PCU

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

PCU

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

PCU

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) Data.

Recordable System Data.

Recordable System Data.

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Alarm Log

Menu

Displays the alarms (with date and time stamp) recorded for the Distribution Panel element of the system.

Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to scroll if multiple alarms are recorded.

A 'music note' ( ♪) after the date/time stamp indicates the alarm went active. A 'checkmark'

() indicates the alarm retired.

Page 2-52 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

Associated with ...

385

386

387

DIST. PANEL B#-P#A/B

NO ALARMS

DIST. PANEL B#-P#A/B

DISCONNECTED

POSITION B#-P#A/B

IS OPEN

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Definition

Distribution

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Distribution

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Distribution

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Recordable Distribution Panel event.

Recordable Distribution Panel event.

Recordable Distribution Panel event.

388

POSITION B#-P#A/B

NOT FOUND or

POSITION NOT FOUND

PANEL B#-P#A/B

Distribution

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Recordable Distribution Panel event.

389

390

391

392

393

394

395

396

397

398

POSITION B#-P#A/B

TYPE UNKNOWN

POSITION B#-P#A/B

OVER CURRENT

DIST. PANEL B#-P#A/B

LVD FAILURE

DIST. PANEL B#-P#A/B

A/B CHANGED

DIST. PANEL B#-P#A/B

PROCESSOR

DIST. PANEL B#-P#A/B IS

DUPLICATED

DIST. PANEL B#-P#A/B

NO RESPONSE

SYSTEM OUTPUT SENSE vv.vvV

TOTAL LOAD CURRENT aaaaaA

GO TO ALARM LOG MENU

Distribution

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Distribution

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Distribution

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Distribution

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Distribution

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Distribution

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Distribution

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Distribution

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Distribution

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Distribution

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Recordable Distribution Panel event.

Recordable Distribution Panel event.

Recordable Distribution Panel event.

Recordable Distribution Panel event.

Recordable Distribution Panel event.

Recordable Distribution Panel event.

Recordable Distribution Panel event.

Recordable System Data.

Recordable System Data.

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-53

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

399

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

400

401

402

403

404

405

406

407

408

409

410 dd-mon-yy hh:mm:ss

I/O B#-P#

I/O BOARD B#-P#

NO ALARMS

I/O BOARD B#-P#

BINARY I#

I/O BOARD B#-P#

OVER CURRENT

I/O BOARD B#-P#

PROCESSOR

I/O BOARD B#-P#

IS DUPLICATED

I/O BOARD B#-P#

NO RESPONSE

SYSTEM OUTPUT SENSE vv.vvV

TOTAL LOAD CURRENT aaaaaA

GO TO ALARM LOG MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING or

♪ dd-mon-yy hh:mm:ss

I/O B#-P#

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Associated with ...

Definition

Distribution

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Alarm Log

Menu

Displays the alarms (with date and time stamp) recorded for the MCA I/O element of the system.

Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to scroll if multiple alarms are recorded.

A 'music note' ( ♪) after the date/time stamp indicates the alarm went active. A 'checkmark'

() indicates the alarm retired.

I/O Board

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

I/O Board

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

I/O Board

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

I/O Board

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

I/O Board

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

I/O Board

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

I/O Board

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

I/O Board

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

I/O Board

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

I/O Board

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Recordable Relay event.

Recordable Relay event.

Recordable Relay event.

Recordable Relay event.

Recordable Relay event.

Recordable Relay event.

Recordable System Data.

Recordable System Data.

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Page 2-54 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

Associated with ...

411

412

413

414

415

416

417

418

419

420

421

422

423

424 dd-mon-yy hh:mm:ss

ROUTER B#

ROUTER B#

NO ALARMS or dd-mon-yy hh:mm:ss

ROUTER B#

ROUTER B# REMOTE

SENSE OPEN

ROUTER B# INTERNAL

SENSE OPEN

ROUTER B# PROCESSOR

FAILURE

ROUTER B# REPORTS AN

ILLEGAL NODE

ROUTER B# IS

DUPLICATED

ROUTER B# DOES NOT

RESPOND

ROUTER B# REMOTE

SENSE vv.vvV

ROUTER B# INTERNAL

SENSE vv.vvV

SYSTEM OUTPUT SENSE vv.vvV

TOTAL LOAD CURRENT aaaaaA

GO TO ALARM LOG MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Definition

Alarm Log

Menu

Displays the alarms (with date and time stamp) recorded for the Router element of the system.

Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to scroll if multiple alarms are recorded.

A 'music note' ( ♪) after the date/time stamp indicates the alarm went active. A 'checkmark'

() indicates the alarm retired.

Router

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Router

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Router

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Router

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Router

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Router

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Router

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Router

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Router

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Router

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Router

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Router

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Router

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Recordable Router event.

Recordable Router event.

Recordable Router event.

Recordable Router event.

Recordable Router event.

Recordable Router event.

Recordable Router event.

Recordable Router Data.

Recordable Router Data.

Recordable System Data.

Recordable System Data.

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-55

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

425 dd-mon-yy hh:mm:ss ♪

RELAY B#-P# or dd-mon-yy hh:mm:ss

RELAY B#-P#

426

427

428

429

430

431

432

RELAY BOARD B#-P#

NO ALARMS

RELAY B#-P#-R# IS

STUCK

RELAY BOARD B#-P#

PROCESSOR

RELAY BOARD B#-P# IS

DUPLICATED

RELAY BOARD B#-P#

NO RESPONSE

SYSTEM OUTPUT SENSE vv.vvV

TOTAL LOAD CURRENT aaaaaA

433

434

435

436

GO TO ALARM LOG MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

GO TO FUNCTION MENU

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Associated with ...

Definition

Alarm Log

Menu

Displays the alarms (with date and time stamp) recorded for the Relay element of the system.

Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to scroll if multiple alarms are recorded.

A 'music note' ( ♪) after the date/time stamp indicates the alarm went active. A 'checkmark'

() indicates the alarm retired.

Relay

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Relay

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Relay

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Relay

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Relay

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Relay

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Relay

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Relay

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Relay

Alarm Log

Detail Menu

Alarm Log

Menu

Alarm Log

Menu

Recordable Relay event.

Recordable Relay event.

Recordable Relay event.

Recordable Relay event.

Recordable Relay event.

Recordable System Data.

Recordable System Data.

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Press ENTER to go to this menu.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

Page 2-56 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

Associated with ...

437

438

439

440

441

442

443

444

A

PCU B#-ID#/N#

RECOGNIZED or

DSM B#-P#A/B

RECOGNIZED

I/O B#-P#

RECOGNIZED or or

CRM B#

RECOGNIZED or

RCB B#-P#

RECOGNIZED

GO BACK TO MENU TREE

BEGINNING

NO FUNCTION IN THIS SYSTEM

Function

Menu

Function

Menu

NO FUNCTION IN THIS SYSTEM

NO FUNCTION IN THIS SYSTEM

NO FUNCTION IN THIS SYSTEM

NO FUNCTION IN THIS SYSTEM

NO FUNCTION IN THIS SYSTEM

############ WAIT ##

V###########

Initialization

Menu

B

C

D

E

CHECK VALUES BEFORE

STARTING

FLOAT SETPOINT

= vv.vvV

TEST/EQUALIZE

= vv.vvV

HI VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN

= vv.vvV

Initialization

Menu

Initialization

Menu

Initialization

Menu

Initialization

Menu

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Definition

Lists the last item in the system that was recognized by the MCA.

Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the

MCA Menu Tree.

When the system is initially started, an initialization time and MCA software version number are displayed.

Allows you to view (and change) the MCA settings stored in memory before starting the system.

1. Press the UP and DOWN ARROWS to view (change) the following MCA settings.

Allows you to change the Float Output Voltage set point.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Allows you to change the Test/Equalize Output

Voltage set point.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Allows you to change the High Voltage

Shutdown set point.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-57

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

Message Displayed

PCU CURRENT LIMIT

= aaaaaA

= vv.vvV

= vv.vvV

= vv.vvV

= aaaaaA

= aaaaaA

= aaaaaA or

PCU CURRENT LIMIT

POWER SHARE

SYSTEM HI VOLTAGE #1

SYSTEM HI VOLTAGE #2

BATTERY ON DISCHARGE

= vv.vvV

VERY LOW VOLTAGE

TOTAL LOAD CURRENT

DISTRIBUTION GROUP A

DISTRIBUTION GROUP B

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802

User Instructions

NLEB and 802 NL B

Associated with ...

Definition

Initialization

Menu

Initialization

Menu

Initialization

Menu

Initialization

Menu

Initialization

Menu

Initialization

Menu

Initialization

Menu

Initialization

Menu

Allows you to change the Current Limit set point. aaaaaA = System current limit setting, current limit circuit on all Rectifier Modules are automatically adjusted to ensure system current does not exceed this value.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Note: When Power Share is enabled, current limit is controlled by the Power Share feature.

Allows you to change the System High Voltage

#1 Alarm set point.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Allows you to change the System High Voltage

#2 Alarm set point.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Allows you to change the Battery on Discharge

Alarm set point.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Allows you to change the Very Low Voltage

Alarm set point.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Allows you to change the Total Distribution

Load Current Alarm set point.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Allows you to change the Distribution Group A

Load Current Alarm set point.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Allows you to change the Distribution Group B

Load Current Alarm set point.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

)

Page 2-58 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

Associated with ...

N

O

P

Q

HIGH TEMPERATURE #1

= ttt C/F

HIGH TEMPERATURE #2

= ttt C/F

NO HIGH TEMPERATURE

#2 ALARM or

LOW TEMPERATURE #1

= ttt C/F or

NO LOW TEMPERATURE

#1 ALARM

LOW TEMPERATURE #2

= ttt C/F or

NO LOW TEMPERATURE

#2 ALARM or

NO HIGH TEMPERATURE

#1 ALARM

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Definition

Initialization

Menu

Initialization

Menu

Initialization

Menu

Initialization

Menu

Allows you to change the High Temperature #1

Alarm set point, or disable the alarm.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Note: To disable the feature, press

YES / + / i when in the change setting mode to scroll to NO HIGH

TEMPERATURE #1 ALARM

(displayed when you scroll up to

"100 C").

Allows you to change the High Temperature #2

Alarm set point, or disable the alarm.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Note: To disable the feature, press

YES / + / i when in the change setting mode to scroll to NO HIGH

TEMPERATURE #2 ALARM

(displayed when you scroll up to

"100 C").

Allows you to change the Low Temperature #1

Alarm set point, or disable the alarm.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Note: To disable the feature, press

NO / - when in the change setting mode to scroll to NO LOW

TEMPERATURE #1 ALARM

(displayed when you scroll down to

"-50 C").

Allows you to change the Low Temperature #2

Alarm set point, or disable the alarm.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Note: To disable the feature, press

NO / - when in the change setting mode to scroll to NO LOW

TEMPERATURE #2 ALARM

(displayed when you scroll down to

"-50 C").

Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-59

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

R

S

T

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802

Associated with ...

NLDB , 802

Definition

User Instructions

NLEB and 802 NL B

AUDIBLE SILENT TIME

= mm MINUTES or

AUDIBLE ALARMS STAY

SILENCED

PCU SEQUENCING IS

DISABLED or

PCU SEQUENCING DELAY

= ss SECONDS

TEST EQUALIZE IS DISABLED

TURN OFF POWER SHARE or

MANUAL TEST/EQUALIZE

= hh HOURS or

TEST/EQUALIZE STOP

IS MANUAL

Initialization

Menu

Initialization

Menu

Initialization

Menu

Allows you to enable the MCA Audible Alarm feature and set the Audible Alarm Cutoff Reset

Time Period set point, or disable the feature.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Note: To disable the feature, press

NO / - when in the change setting mode to scroll to AUDIBLE ALARMS

STAY SILENCED (displayed when you scroll down to "zero minutes").

Allows you to enable the Rectifier Sequencing feature and set the Rectifier Sequencing Delay set point, or disable the feature.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Note: To disable the feature, press

NO / - when in the change setting mode to scroll to Rectifier

SEQUENCING IS DISABLED

(displayed when you scroll down to

"zero seconds").

Allows you to enable the Manual Timed

Test/Equalize feature and set the Timed

Test/Equalize set point, or disable the feature.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Note: To disable the feature, press

NO / - when in the change setting mode to scroll to TEST/EQUALIZE

STOP IS MANUAL (displayed when you scroll down to "zero hours"). This indicates the manually initiated timed test/equalize feature is disabled and the system must be manually returned to the float mode if placed in the test/equalize mode.

When the Power Share feature is enabled, the system cannot be placed in the Test/Equalize mode.

Note: Test/Equalize Mode requires Power

Share to be turned off. A message is displayed if Power Share is on. Turn Power Share off first then return to this menu.

)

Page 2-60 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

Associated with ...

U

V

W

X

AUTO EQUALIZE IS

DISABLED or

AUTO EQUALIZE FOR ## x DISCHARGE or

TURN OFF POWER SHARE

NO TEMPERATURE

COMPENSATION

TEMPERATURE SLOPE

= 0.vvvV/ C/F or

TURN OFF POWER SHARE or

MAXIMUM COMPENSATION

= vv.vvV

MINIMUM COMPENSATION

= vv.vvV

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Definition

Initialization

Menu

Initialization

Menu

Initialization

Menu

Initialization

Menu

Allows you to enable the Auto Test/Equalize feature and set the Auto Test/Equalize

Multiplier set point, or disable the feature.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Note: To disable the feature, press

NO / - when in the change setting mode to scroll to AUTO EQUALIZE IS

DISABLED (displayed when you scroll down to "zero x discharge").

When the Power Share feature is enabled, the system cannot be placed in the Test/Equalize mode.

Note: Test/Equalize Mode requires Power

Share to be turned off. A message is displayed if Power Share is on. Turn Power Share off first then return to this menu.

Allows you to enable the Battery Charge

Temperature Compensation feature and set the Battery Charge Temperature

Compensation Slope set point, or disable the feature.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Note: To disable the feature, press

NO / - when in the change setting mode to scroll to NO TEMPERATURE

COMPENSATION (displayed when you scroll down to "0V / ~").

Note: This is the voltage slope of the entire battery string, not individual cells.

Note: The Temperature Compensation feature requires Power Share to be turned off. A message is displayed if Power Share is on.

Turn Power Share off first then return to this menu to enable Temperature Compensation.

Allows you to change the Maximum Voltage with Temperature Compensation set point.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Allows you to change the Minimum Voltage with Temperature Compensation set point.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-61

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MCA Menu

Tree Line No.

(Section

5886)

Message Displayed

Y

IT IS NOW hh:mm:ss dd-mon-yy

Z

READY TO START THE

SYSTEM NOW?

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Associated with ...

Definition

Initialization

Menu

Initialization

Menu

Allows you to change the time and date.

1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.

Allows you to start the system with the selected settings.

1. Press ENTER and ALARM CUTOFF

(at the same time).

2. At the "ARE YOU SURE?" prompt, press YES / + / i.

Page 2-62 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

CHAPTER 3

SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

LMS Operating Procedures ............................................................................................. 3-2

LMS Local Port ................................................................................................................ 3-2

Installing the USB Device Driver from the Furnished CD ......................................... 3-2

Downloading the USB Driver from the Web ............................................................. 3-3

Setting up your Computer to Access the Power System .......................................... 3-3

Local Controls and Indicators .......................................................................................... 3-3

Location and Identification ........................................................................................ 3-3

LMS Main/Expansion CPU Circuit Card (if furnished) Controls and Indicators ........ 3-3

Bay LED Indicator ..................................................................................................... 3-4

Distribution Bus LED Indicator .................................................................................. 3-4

MCA Component LED Indicator ................................................................................ 3-4

Bay Monitoring and Control Section Indicators ......................................................... 3-4

MCA Controls and Indicators .................................................................................... 3-5

MCA Display ............................................................................................................. 3-6

Surge Suppression Alarms (available only if a Surge Suppression Option is furnished) .................................................................................................................. 3-6

Rectifier Controls and Indicators ............................................................................... 3-7

208V and 480V Input Rectifiers .......................................................................... 3-7

External Alarms ............................................................................................................... 3-8

Starting and Stopping System Operation ........................................................................ 3-8

Rectifier Normal Starting Procedure ......................................................................... 3-8

Rectifier Stopping Procedure (Local) ........................................................................ 3-8

Complete Shutdown ........................................................................................... 3-8

Local TR Shutdown ............................................................................................ 3-8

Rectifier Stopping Procedure (Remote) (if optional LMS installed) .......................... 3-8

Restarting Procedures when Rectifier is Automatically or Manually Inhibited, Shut

Down, or Locked Out ....................................................................................................... 3-9

Rectifier High Voltage Shutdown Lockout ................................................................ 3-9

Rectifier Emergency Shutdown and Fire Alarm Disconnect ..................................... 3-9

Remote On/Off (TR) .................................................................................................. 3-9

Output Voltage Mode of Operation Selection .................................................................. 3-9

Placing the System into the Float Mode of Operation .............................................. 3-9

Placing the System into the Test/Equalize Mode of Operation .............................. 3-10

Method 1 (Manual Test/Equalize) Procedure ................................................... 3-10

Method 2 (Manually Initiated Timed Test/Equalize) Procedure ....................... 3-12

Method 3 (Automatic Test/Equalize) Procedure .............................................. 3-14

Method 4 (External Test/Equalize) Procedure ................................................. 3-16

Setting MCA Audible Alarm Cutoff Reset Time Period ................................................. 3-17

Procedure ......................................................................................................... 3-17

Setting Rectifier Sequencing Delay Time Period .......................................................... 3-18

Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures Page 3-1

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Procedure ......................................................................................................... 3-18

Setting MCA Custom Text Messages (Names) ............................................................. 3-19

Procedure ......................................................................................................... 3-19

Mapping LMS LED Channels to the MCA Display and MCA Customer Alarm

Relays ............................................................................................................................ 3-20

Procedure ......................................................................................................... 3-20

Using the Alarm Relay Test Feature ............................................................................. 3-20

MCA “Power Share” Feature ......................................................................................... 3-21

Description .............................................................................................................. 3-21

Operating Modes..................................................................................................... 3-21

Low Load Operation ......................................................................................... 3-21

Normal Load Operation .................................................................................... 3-21

High Load Operation ........................................................................................ 3-21

Overload Operation .......................................................................................... 3-21

Requirements and Conditions ................................................................................. 3-21

Programming the MCA Power Share Feature in the New Power System ............. 3-22

Enabling Power Share ...................................................................................... 3-22

Setting the Power Share Initial Capacity Limit ................................................. 3-22

Setting the Power Share Voltage Offset........................................................... 3-23

Verifying the Operation of the Power Share Feature .............................................. 3-23

MCA “ALTERNATE CURRENT LIMIT” FEATURE ....................................................... 3-25

Description .............................................................................................................. 3-25

Operating Modes..................................................................................................... 3-25

Normal Current Limit Operation ....................................................................... 3-25

Alternate Current Limit Operation ..................................................................... 3-25

Requirements and Conditions ................................................................................. 3-25

Programming the MCA Alternate Current Limit Feature ......................................... 3-25

Enabling Alternate Current Limit ...................................................................... 3-25

Setting the Alternate Current Limit Initial Capacity Limit .................................. 3-26

LMS OPERATING PROCEDURES

Refer to the LMS User Instructions (Section 5847) for LMS operating procedures.

Section 5847 can be accessed via the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.

LMS LOCAL PORT

The LMS Local Port is provided via a USB to RS-232 Port Adapter Unit. The proper device driver must be installed on the computer to be connected to the USB port. Use one of the following procedures to install the device driver.

Installing the USB Device Driver from the Furnished CD

A device driver CD is supplied with the USB to RS-232 Port Adapter Unit. The proper driver must be installed on the computer to be connected to the USB port. Use the provided CD to install the driver.

Page 3-2 Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Downloading the USB Driver from the Web

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

1) Go to this link http://vscom.de/downloadcenter.htm

.

2) Select “USB to Serial Drivers” from the Product Category drop-down menu.

3) Select your product model’s “Driver and Documentation” to download the files.

4) Select your computer ’s operating system.

5) Run or save the application.

Setting up your Computer to Access the Power System

1) Select Hyper terminal.

2) Connect using one of the unused COM ports. (e.g. COM 5)

3) Set Bit Per Second to 19200.

4) Set Data Bits to 8.

5) Set Parity to None.

6) Set Stop bits to 1.

7) Set Flow control to Hardware.

8) Select OK.

9) In Hyper terminal press ENTER.

10) Enter the password 6.

11) Enter “?” to see commands.

LOCAL CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

Location and Identification

Refer to the illustrations in Chapter 1. System Overview.

LMS Main/Expansion CPU Circuit Card

(if furnished) Controls and Indicators

Refer to the LMS User Instructions (Section 5847). Section 5847 can be accessed via the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.

Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures Page 3-3

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Bay LED Indicator

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Located on the top front panel of each bay.

Green (steady)

Red (steady)

Yellow (flashing)

Bay is 'OK'

'Bay Failure'

Note: “Bay Failure” conditions for the Primary

Power/Distribution and Power Only Bays are set via the MCA Relay Function Channel #24

configuration.

Bay is being 'Identified' by MCA

Distribution Bus LED Indicator

Located next to each Distribution Bus (on the front of each MCA Distribution Bus

Monitoring circuit card hinged panel) in each bay.

Green (steady)

Red (steady)

Yellow (flashing)

Distribution Bus is 'OK'

'Distribution Bus Failure'

Distribution Bus is being 'Identified' by MCA

MCA Component LED Indicator

Each MCA component (i.e. Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Card, Bay MCA/Router

Circuit Card, MCA Relay Circuit Card, MCA I/O Circuit Card) contains an LED Indicator.

Green (steady)

Red (steady)

Yellow (flashing)

Component is 'OK'

'Component Failure'

Component is being 'Identified' by MCA

Bay Monitoring and Control Section Indicators

Located in each Bay's Monitoring and Control Section (see illustrations in Chapter 1).

Power

FA

Illuminates Green when DC input power is being supplied to the Bay's 'Monitor and Control Section'.

Illuminates Red when any fuse on the Bay's 'Monitor and Control Section' opens (i.e. input fuses to Bay's

MCA/Router circuit card, Bay's LMS Main/Expansion

CPU circuit card, and Bay's Distribution Bus

Monitoring circuit cards).

Page 3-4 Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MCA Controls and Indicators

Control / Indicator Description

FUNCTION SELECT UP

FUNCTION SELECT DOWN

(Arrow Pushbuttons)

Moves up and down, respectively, through the list of available entries in the currently displayed menu.

FUNCTION SET

ENTER /←/→

(Pushbutton)

Used to move to another menu, as determined by the currently displayed entry. Also used to lock the displayed setting or value of the currently selected menu entry, when in the adjustment or change setting mode.

Note: Pressing the ALARM CUTOFF pushbutton and the FUNCTION SET

ENTER pushbutton simultaneously, allows the User to enter the adjustment or change setting mode, to change the value or setting of the currently selected menu entry, if available.

FUNCTION SET YES (+) (i)

FUNCTION SET NO (-)

(Pushbuttons)

ALARM CUTOFF

(Pushbutton)

ALARM CUTOFF

(Indicator)

Used to increase or decrease the value of the currently selected menu entry when in the adjustment or change setting mode.

Note: Pressing the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously moves the user to the "Initial Message" display

(beginning).

Note: When in the adjustment or change setting mode, depressing the

FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton after the "ARE YOU SURE?" prompt accepts the new value or setting, depressing the FUNCTION

SET NO (-) pushbutton after the "ARE YOU SURE?" prompt cancels the adjustment or change setting mode without making any changes.

Note: You can view additional information when the MCA displays the "i" symbol by pressing this key.

Silences the audible alarm. Any new alarms will reactivate the audible alarm.

Note: Pressing the ALARM CUTOFF pushbutton and the FUNCTION SET

ENTER pushbutton simultaneously, allows the user to enter the adjustment or change setting mode, to change the value or setting of the currently selected menu entry, if available.

Illuminates yellow when the MCA audible alarm has been silenced using the

ALARM CUTOFF Pushbutton.

Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures Page 3-5

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MAJOR

(Indicator)

MINOR

(Indicator)

AC

(Indicator)

TEST/EQ

(Indicator)

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Flashes red if any condition listed below occurs.

AC fail on two or more Rectifiers.

Rectifier fail alarm activates on two or more Rectifiers.

Battery On Discharge alarm activates.

Very Low Voltage alarm activates.

High Voltage Alarm 1 activates.

High Voltage Alarm 2 activates.

Emergency Stop or Remote HVS activated.

If any system distribution fuse or circuit breaker opens.

Any High or Low Temperature Alarm activates.

Any Router, Distribution, MCA Relay, or MCA I/O circuit card alarm activates.

Duplicate Rectifier, Router, Distribution, MCA Relay, or MCA I/O circuit card reference designation.

System component cannot be identified.

MCA Hardware/Software failure.

MCA Initializing.

Illuminates red if any condition listed below occurs.

Rectifier fail alarm activates on any single Rectifier.

If the over-current alarm activates.

Loss of communication to the display or LMS.

Illuminates green if AC input voltage to all Rectifiers is greater than the preset non-adjustable low AC input voltage inhibit, less than the preset nonadjustable high AC input voltage inhibit, and the Standby/Operate switch on each Rectifier is in the I "operate" position. Illuminates red if AC input voltage to any Rectifier decreases below or increases above the respective inhibit value.

Danger: In standby mode, AC input power IS connected to the Rectifier.

Illuminates yellow when the system is placed in the test/equalize mode, locally or remotely.

MCA Display

Refer to Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA for MCA Display descriptions.

Surge Suppression Alarms

(available only if a Surge Suppression Option is furnished)

If a surge suppression assembly operates, the MCA displays a "Binary Input Customer

Text Message" in the I/O Board Alarm Detail Message. If you wish to change the default message, refer to the " SETTING MCA CUSTOM TEXT MESSAGES " in this chapter.

"MCA Customer Alarm Relays" may also be programmed to provide an external alarm.

Note that a Surge Suppression Alarm is active when there is NO AC power, and resets when AC power is supplied.

Page 3-6 Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Rectifier Controls and Indicators

208V and 480V Input Rectifiers

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Control / Indicator

Operate / Standby Switch

AC / Identify Indicator

Protection Alarm Indicator

Fail Alarm Indicator

OUTPUT CURRENT

Bargraph

Description

This two positions rocker switch provides the following functions.

I (Operate): Enables the Rectifier to provide output power.

(Standby): Inhibits Rectifier output.

Note: In standby mode, AC input power remains connected to the Rectifier.

This LED operates as follows.

Steady green indicates AC input voltage to the

Rectifier is within the specified operating range and the Operate/Standby switch is in the 'Operate' position.

Blinking green indicates the Rectifier is being

'Identified' by MCA.

This LED operates as follows.

Steady YELLOW indicates.

AC input under/over voltage.

Rectifier PFC output under/over voltage.

High temperature.

Current sharing imbalance.

Blinking YELLOW indicates:

Rectifier communication failure.

This LED operates as follows.

Steady RED indicates.

Output over-voltage.

Output fuse blown.

Rectifier ID fault.

Blinking red indicates:

Faulty fan.

Shows the Rectifier's output current.

Each LED segment represents 20A. If the rectifier is in current limit (output current > 200A), the tenth LED blinks.

Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures Page 3-7

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

EXTERNAL ALARMS

MCA Customer Alarm Relay circuit cards may be installed. These alarm relays are mapped to the MCA alarms per the MCA configuration. See the table in Section 5876

(Installation Instructions) for the MCA default configuration. Another table is provided in

Section 5876 (Installation Instructions) to document a custom configuration.

STARTING AND STOPPING SYSTEM OPERATION

Rectifier Normal Starting Procedure

Place the Rectifier Standby/Operate switch in the I "operate" position.

Rectifier Stopping Procedure (Local)

Complete Shutdown

1) Place the Rectifier Standby/Operate switch in the "standby" position.

Local TR Shutdown

Note: When a Rectifier is shut down via the Local TR Shutdown feature, it must be manually restarted. The Local TR Shutdown feature DOES NOT automatically restart Rectifiers to deliver current in any operational or alarm state of the DC plant. The Rectifier must be manually restarted by navigating the MCA and selecting to turn the Rectifier back ON as detailed in the following procedure.

1) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

2) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"TURN PCU ON OR OFF" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET

ENTER key.

3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT UP or DOWN arrow key until the Rectifier to be stopped using the local TR feature is displayed.

4) With this Rectifier being displayed, press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and

FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

5) "ARE YOU SURE?" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

6) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

7) Repeat this procedure to restart the Rectifier.

Rectifier Stopping Procedure (Remote) (if optional LMS installed)

Refer to the LMS User Instructions (Section 5847). Section 5847 can be accessed via the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.

Page 3-8 Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

RESTARTING PROCEDURES WHEN RECTIFIER IS

AUTOMATICALLY OR MANUALLY INHIBITED, SHUT DOWN, OR

LOCKED OUT

Rectifier High Voltage Shutdown Lockout

Place the Standby/Operate switch to the "standby" position, and then back to the I

"operate" position.

Rectifier Emergency Shutdown and Fire Alarm Disconnect

Remove the emergency shutdown and fire alarm disconnect signal, and on each Rectifier place the Standby/Operate switch to the "standby" position and then back to the I

"operate" position.

Remote On/Off (TR)

Remove the remote on/off (TR) signal from the respective Rectifier. The signal can originate from the LMS (if installed), or via the local MCA Control Panel.

OUTPUT VOLTAGE MODE OF OPERATION SELECTION

Placing the System into the Float Mode of Operation

Manually place the system into float mode by navigating to and activating the "TEST/EQ

MODE ACTIVE. SET FLOAT?" menu item in the MCA function menu. A step-by-step procedure is provided next.

1) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

Note: In the following step, if "FLOAT MODE IS ACTIVE. SET TEST/EQ?" is displayed, the system is already operating in the float mode. In this case, DO

NOT perform steps 2) through 4), proceed with step 5).

2) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key to display

"TEST/EQ MODE ACTIVE. SET FLOAT?".

3) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

4) "ARE YOU SURE?" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

5) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures Page 3-9

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Placing the System into the Test/Equalize Mode of Operation

Warning: Do not supply equalize output voltage for a longer period than necessary. Prolonged higher battery charge voltage overcharges the battery cells and reduces battery life.

Note: Test/Equalize Mode requires Power Share to be turned off.

There are four methods of placing the system from the float mode to the test/equalize mode.

Method 1 (Manual Test/Equalize) Procedure

In this method, a user manually places the system into the test/equalize mode via the

MCA Control Panel. A user must manually return the system to the float mode via the

MCA Control Panel. Follow the procedures described below.

Setting for Manual Test/Equalize: Set the "MANUAL TEST/EQUALIZE = hh HOURS" menu item in the MCA configure menu to below 0. The display changes to

"TEST/EQUALIZE STOP IS MANUAL" to indicate manual test/equalize mode is set. A step-by-step procedure is provided next.

1) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

2) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"CHANGE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

3) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key to display

"MANUAL TEST/EQUALIZE = hh HOURS" or "TEST/EQUALIZE STOP IS

MANUAL" is displayed.

Note: If "TEST/EQUALIZE STOP IS MANUAL" is displayed, the system is already set for manual test/equalize. In this case, proceed with step 8).

Note: If "END TEST/EQUALIZE IN hhh.hh HOURS" is displayed, the system is set for manually initiated timed test/equalize, and a timed test/equalize is in progress. In this case, you can proceed with steps 4) through 7) to cancel the timed test/equalize in progress and change the current setting, or proceed with step 8) to proceed with the timed test/equalize in progress and make no changes.

4) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

5) Press the FUNCTION SET NO / - key to scroll the displayed value towards 0.

Release the key when "TEST/EQUALIZE STOP IS MANUAL" is displayed. This indicates the manually initiated timed test/equalize feature is disabled and the system must be manually returned to the float mode if placed in the test/equalize mode.

6) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

7) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

Page 3-10 Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

8) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

Placing the System into Test/Equalize Mode: Manually place the system into test/equalize mode by navigating to and activating the "FLOAT MODE IS ACTIVE. SET

TEST/EQ?" menu item in the MCA function menu. The system is placed in the test/equalize mode and must be manually placed back to the float mode. A step-by-step procedure is provided next.

1) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

Note: In the following step, if "TEST/EQ MODE ACTIVE. SET FLOAT?" is displayed, the system is already operating in the test/equalize mode. In this case, DO NOT perform steps 2) through 4), proceed with step 5).

2) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key to display "FLOAT

MODE IS ACTIVE. SET TEST/EQ?".

3) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

4) "ARE YOU SURE?" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

5) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

Returning to Float Mode: To return to float mode, navigate to and activate the

"TEST/EQ MODE ACTIVE. SET FLOAT?" menu item in the MCA function menu, as previously described in this chapter.

Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures Page 3-11

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Method 2 (Manually Initiated Timed Test/Equalize) Procedure

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

In this method, a user manually places the system into the test/equalize mode via the

MCA Control Panel. The system automatically returns to the float mode after a preset programmable time period (1-99 hours, in increments of one hour). Follow the procedures described below.

Setting for Manually Initiated Timed Test/Equalize: Set the "MANUAL

TEST/EQUALIZE = hh HOURS" menu item in the MCA configure menu to a value between 1 and 99. A step-by-step procedure is provided next.

1) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

2) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"CHANGE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

3) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key to display

"MANUAL TEST/EQUALIZE = hh HOURS" or "TEST/EQUALIZE STOP IS

MANUAL" is displayed.

Note: If "MANUAL TEST/EQUALIZE = hh HOURS" is displayed, the system is already set for manually initiated timed test/equalize. In this case, you can proceed with steps 4) through 7) to change the current setting, or proceed with step 8) if no changes are required.

Note: If "END TEST/EQUALIZE IN hhh.hh HOURS" is displayed, the system is already set for manually initiated timed test/equalize, and a timed test/equalize is in progress. In this case, you can proceed with steps 4) through 7) to cancel the timed test/equalize in progress and change the current setting, or proceed with step 8) to proceed with the timed test/equalize in progress and make no changes.

4) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

5) Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or FUNCTION SET NO (-) key until the desired value is displayed, then release the key. Note that as you scroll BELOW

0, "TEST/EQUALIZE STOP IS MANUAL" is displayed. Scroll back up to redisplay "MANUAL TEST/EQUALIZE =".

6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

7) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

8) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

Placing the System into Test/Equalize Mode: Manually place the system into test/equalize mode by navigating to and activating the "FLOAT MODE ACTIVE. SET

TEST/EQ?" menu item in the MCA function menu. The system is placed in the test/equalize mode for the time period set in "MANUAL TEST/EQUALIZE = hh HOURS".

The system automatically returns to the float mode when this time period expires. A step-by-step procedure is provided next.

Page 3-12 Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

1) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

Note: In the following step, if "TEST/EQ MODE ACTIVE. SET FLOAT?" is displayed, the system is already operating in the test/equalize mode. In this case, DO NOT perform steps 2) through 4), proceed with step 5).

2) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key to display "FLOAT

MODE IS ACTIVE. SET TEST/EQ?".

3) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

4) "ARE YOU SURE?" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

5) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

Returning to Float Mode: The system automatically returns to float mode when the

"timed test/equalize period" expires.

Note: Navigating to "END TEST/EQUALIZE IN hhh.hh HOURS" of the MCA configure menu displays the hours remaining in the timed test/equalize period.

Note: Timed test/equalize is canceled and the system is placed in the float mode if any of the following occurs.

1) Manually placing the system in the float mode by navigating to and activating

"TEST/EQ MODE ACTIVE. SET FLOAT?" menu item in the MCA function menu, as previously described in this chapter.

2) Resetting the "MANUAL TEST/EQUALIZE = hh HOURS" value in the MCA configure menu when "END TEST/EQUALIZE IN hhh.hh HOURS" is being displayed, as described in the previous procedure

3) Applying an external test/equalize signal as described in the next procedure.

Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures Page 3-13

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Method 3 (Automatic Test/Equalize) Procedure

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

In this method, a user enables the Automatic Equalize feature via the MCA Control

Panel. The system is automatically placed in the equalize mode and automatically returns to float mode for the conditions as described above. Follow the procedures described below.

Note: The automatic equalize feature is intended for use only with wet cell batteries.

Using this feature with valve regulated batteries is not recommended.

Description

This feature can be enabled or disabled by a user via the MCA. The default state is disabled.

The Automatic Equalize feature is a time based function which is controlled by a customer selectable multiplier and by the "System Battery is on Discharge" alarm setpoint. The MCA’s default setting is for a multiplier of zero, which disables the

Automatic Equalize feature.

When the Automatic Equalize feature is enabled, if system voltage drops to less than the

"System Battery is on Discharge" alarm setpoint, the MCA initiates a timing cycle to measure the discharge time period. The MCA requires at least 15 minutes of continuous

"System Battery is on Discharge" alarm in order to prevent nuisance equalization cycles.

When system voltage rises to above the "System Battery is on Discharge" alarm setpoint, the MCA ends the discharge timing cycle and (assuming a minimum of 15 minutes has elapsed) places the Rectifiers into the equalize mode for a customer selectable multiple of the discharge time period (the discharge time period includes the initial 15 minutes).

The equalize time period can be set for 0 to 15 times the discharge time period, up to a maximum of 300 hours. A zero (0) setting disables the feature.

When the Automatic Equalize feature is enabled, the MCA prevents a user from setting the equalize value lower than the float setpoint. If the equalize value is set first, the MCA automatically sets the Automatic Equalize Multiplier to zero (0), disabling the feature.

Manually setting the system to float or equalize mode cancels the automatic function, if active.

Note: Equalization is only effective if the correct multiplier is entered to allow the battery to charge to capacity. It makes no sense to end the equalize cycle before battery capacity has been restored. To determine the multiplier, load current and system capacity must be known. For example, consider a system with 200 amps of

Rectifier capacity and 150 amps of load. If there is a 2-hour outage of AC power,

300 amp-hours (150 x 2) will be drained from the battery. When AC power is restored, the battery charge current will be 50 amps (200-150), and it will take at least 6 hours (300/50) to replace the battery capacity. In this scenario, the multiplier must be set greater than 3 for the Automatic Equalize feature to have any effect.

Enabling and Disabling the Automatic Equalize Feature: To enable, set the "AUTO

EQUALIZE FOR ## x DISCHARGE" menu item in the MCA Configure Menu to a value between 0 and 15. To disable, set the "AUTO EQUALIZE FOR ## x DISCHARGE" menu item in the MCA Configure Menu to 0. A step-by-step procedure is provided next.

1) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press

Page 3-14 Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013 and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

2) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"CHANGE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"AUTO EQUALIZE FOR ## x DISCHARGE" or "AUTO EQUALIZE IS

DISABLED" is displayed.

Note: If "AUTO EQUALIZE FOR ## x DISCHARGE" is displayed, the system is already set for Automatic Equalize. In this case, you can proceed with steps

4) through 7) to change the current setting, or proceed with step 8) if no changes are required.

Note: If "END AUTO EQUALIZE IN hhh.hh HOURS" is displayed, the system is already set for Automatic Equalize, and an Automatic Equalize is in progress.

In this case, you can proceed with steps 4) through 7) to cancel the Automatic

Equalize in progress and change the current setting, or proceed with step 8) to proceed with the Automatic Equalize in progress and make no changes.

4) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

5) Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or FUNCTION SET NO (-) key until the desired value is displayed, then release the key. Note that as you scroll below 1,

"AUTO EQUALIZE IS DISABLED" is displayed. Scroll back up to redisplay

"AUTO EQUALIZE FOR ##".

6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

7) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

8) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

Placing the System into Test/Equalize Mode: The MCA automatically does this for the conditions as previously described.

Returning to Float Mode: The MCA automatically does this for the conditions as previously described.

Note: Navigating to "END AUTO EQUALIZE IN hhh.hh HOURS" of the MCA Configure

Menu displays the hours remaining in an automatic equalize period, if active.

Note: Auto Equalize is canceled and the system is placed in the float mode if any of the following occurs.

1) Manually placing the system in the float mode by navigating to and activating

"TEST/EQUALIZE MODE ACTIVE. SET FLOAT?" menu item in the MCA

Function Menu.

2) Resetting the "AUTO EQUALIZE FOR ## x DISCHARGE" value in the MCA

Configure Menu when "END AUTO hhh.hh HR" is being displayed, as described in the previous procedure

3) Applying an external test/equalize signal.

Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures Page 3-15

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Method 4 (External Test/Equalize) Procedure

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

In this method, a user (or external equipment) places the system in the test/equalize mode by applying an external signal to the system. The system returns to the float mode when the external signal is removed. This method overrides the other three methods.

Placing the System into Test/Equalize Mode: Apply an external test/equalize loop closure to the system's remote equalize terminals.

Returning to Float Mode: Remove the external test/equalize loop closure from the system's remote equalize terminals.

Note: If a manual test/equalize, manually initiated timed test/equalize ,or automatic equalize is in process; it is canceled and the system returns to float mode when system ground is removed from the test/equalize terminal.

Page 3-16 Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

SETTING MCA AUDIBLE ALARM CUTOFF RESET TIME PERIOD

An audible alarm device is located on the MCA Control Panel. This alarm sounds when any alarm condition monitored by the MCA occurs. The alarm can be manually silenced

(cut off) by pressing a local key. A local indicator illuminates when the audible alarm has been cut off. The alarm remains silenced for the current alarm condition only. If another alarm condition occurs, the audible alarm again sounds.

A programmable audible alarm cutoff reset feature is provided. Once an audible alarm has been cut off, it automatically resets (and sounds if the alarm condition is still present) after the time period programmed expires. If another alarm condition occurs, the audible alarm again sounds.

The MCA Audible Alarm Cutoff Reset feature is active when an "AUDIBLE SILENT TIME

= mm MINUTES" value is selected.

The MCA Audible Alarm Cutoff Reset feature is inactive when "AUDIBLE ALARMS STAY

SILENCED" is selected.

Procedure

1) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

2) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"CHANGE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

3) "AUDIBLE SILENT TIME = mm MINUTES" or "AUDIBLE ALARMS STAY

SILENCED" is displayed.

4) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

5) Observe the value displayed. Press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or

NO (-) key until the desired value or "AUDIBLE ALARMS STAY SILENCED" is displayed. Release the key.

6) With the desired value or "AUDIBLE ALARMS STAY SILENCED" being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

7) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

Note: The audible alarm cutoff reset time period will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.

8) To return to the beginning of the MCA Logic Tree, press and release the

FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously.

Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures Page 3-17

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

SETTING RECTIFIER SEQUENCING DELAY TIME PERIOD

The MCA can be set to provide Rectifier Sequencing. When the MCA senses an “AC

POWER IS OFF TO All PCU s” alarm, it turns off all Rectifiers. When the “AC POWER IS

OFF TO ALL PCU s” alarm clears, the MCA turns on Rectifier #1, then turns on the other

Rectifiers starting with Rectifier #2 every n seconds (n is user programmable from 1 to 20 seconds). If the MCA fails or the communication link is broken during a Rectifier

Sequencing routine, all Rectifiers turn on immediately.

The time delay between turning individual Rectifiers on is adjustable from 1 to 20 seconds, or you can set the feature to be disabled. Refer to the following procedure.

Procedure

1) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

2) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"CHANGE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

3) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until "PCU

SEQUENCE DELAY = ss SECONDS" or "PCU SEQUENCING IS DISABLED" is displayed.

4) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

5) Observe the value displayed. Press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or

NO (-) key until the desired value or "PCU SEQUENCING IS DISABLED" is displayed. Release the key.

6) With the desired value or "PCU SEQUENCING IS DISABLED" being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

7) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

Note: The Rectifier sequencing feature will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.

8) To return to the beginning of the MCA Logic Tree, press and release the

FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously.

Page 3-18 Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

SETTING MCA CUSTOM TEXT MESSAGES (NAMES)

You can set a custom text message (name) to be displayed for the following MCA items…

MCA, Router (Bay), Rectifier, Distribution Bus, Individual Distribution Points, MCA

Customer Alarm Relay Cards, Individual MCA Relays, MCA I/O Card Binary Alarms.

Whenever the MCA is displaying specific information pertaining to a specific MCA item, an i (information available) is also displayed on the fourth line. Pressing the FUNCTION

SET YES (+) (i) key toggles the name of the displayed MCA item between the normal

MCA naming convention and a custom test message (if set).

To enter or change a custom text message, perform the following procedure.

Procedure

1) Navigate to an MCA menu item that displays information about the particular

MCA item you want to set a custom text message for. Note that the i is displayed on the fourth line.

2) Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) (i) key to display the text message.

3) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

4) An underline appears below the first character. Repeatedly, press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) keys to enter the desired character.

5) Press the FUNCTION SET ENTER key to lock the character and to move to the next character.

6) You can enter up to 32 characters for the custom text message in this fashion. If the custom text message contains less then 32 characters, simply repeatedly press the FUNCTION SET ENTER key until you exit the text change mode.

Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures Page 3-19

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MAPPING LMS LED CHANNELS TO THE MCA

DISPLAY AND MCA CUSTOMER ALARM RELAYS

You can set the MCA to display a message if an LMS LED channel activates. You can then map an MCA Customer Alarm Relay to also activate.

Procedure

1) Map the LMS LED Channel to one of the MCA Relay Function Channels by adding the Monitoring LED * Message condition to the MCA Relay Function

Channel definition. Refer to Setting and Testing MCA Customer Alarm Relays in

Chapter 5 of the separate INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS (Section 5876) for a procedure. (Note that if you add the LMS LED Channel condition to the default

MCA Relay Function Channel #1, the condition will be mapped and displayed as an MCA Major Alarm condition. Note that if you add the LMS LED Channel condition to the default MCA Relay Function Channel #2, the condition will be mapped and displayed as an MCA Minor Alarm condition. Note that if you add the LMS LED Channel condition to any other MCA Relay Function Channel, the condition will be mapped and displayed as an MCA Info condition.)

2) Now you can map an MCA Customer Alarm Relay to activate when the LMS LED

Channel activates by assigning the MCA Relay Function Channel defined above to a particular MCA Relay. Refer to Setting and Testing MCA Customer Alarm

Relays in "Chapter 5. Installing the Rectifiers and Initially Starting the System" in the separate INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS (Section 5876) for a procedure.

USING THE ALARM RELAY TEST FEATURE

Refer to Setting and Testing MCA Customer Alarm Relays in "Chapter 5. Installing the

Rectifiers and Initially Starting the System" in the separate INSTALLATION

INSTRUCTIONS (Section 5876).

Page 3-20 Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA “POWER SHARE” FEATURE

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Description

The MCA Power Share feature allows you to connect a Spec. No. 582140000 Power

S ystem (referred to as “New Power System” in this document) to an existing DC power system (referred to as “Existing Power System” in this document) instead of extending or completely replacing the Existing Power System.

The MCA Power Share feature provides for the sharing of the total load in a controlled manner.

When Power Share is programmed, the MCA in the New Power System adjusts Rectifier output voltage per load demands to ensure proper sharing between the New and Existing

Power Systems.

Operating Modes

Depending on the systems’ configurations, their Rectifier capacities, their distribution load capacities, and the Power Share configuration; four operating modes can occur.

Low Load Operation

When the total load current demand is lower than the programmed percentage value of the total capacity of the New Power System that will initially feed the load (PS Initial

Capacity Limit), the New Power System voltage will be increased by the programmed

PS Voltage Offset forcing the New Power System to carry the load. Make sure that the output voltage does not exceed the battery float range recommended by the manufacturer. In this operating mode, no current will be delivered by the Existing Power

System.

Normal Load Operation

When the total load current demand reaches the PS Initial Capacity Limit, the New

Power System output voltage will be decreased by the PS Voltage Offset, allowing the

Existing Power System to deliver the remaining current up to the New Power System’s maximum capacity. Both New and Existing Power Systems are now providing current to the load.

High Load Operation

When the total load current demand exceeds the sum of the maximum capacity of the

Existing Power System and the PS Initial Capacity Limit of the New Power System, the

New Power System will deliver the remaining current up to the maximum of its capacity.

The two systems will then reach their maximum capacities. This operation may occur when the batteries are being recharged, after a commercial AC failure for example.

Overload Operation

When the total load current demand is higher than the sum of the maximum capacity of the Existing Power System and the maximum capacity of the New Power System, both

Existing and New Power Systems and the batteries will feed the load. The output voltage will depend on the conditions of the batteries. This operation occurs if the total capacity of the PCUs (rectifiers) is too low in relation to the need for increased current.

Requirements and Conditions

The two DC power systems must be connected in parallel as described in the Installation

Instructions (Section 5776).

Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures Page 3-21

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Programming the MCA Power Share Feature in the New Power System

After a New Power System has been connected to an Existing Power System and both systems set for the same float voltage, you will have to configure the Power Share parameters in the MCA of the New Power System.

Note: The “Power Share” feature is not compatible with the temperature compensation feature. If temperature compensation is programmed ON, then “Turn Off

Temperatur e Compensation” is displayed in the Power Share menu. If Power

Share is programmed ON, then “Turn Off Power Share” is displayed in the temperature compensation menu.

Note: The Rectifier current limit menu item setting is ignored when Power Share is enable d. When Power Share is enabled, the message “PCU Current Limit Power

Share” is displayed in the PCU Current Limit menu.

Enabling Power Share

1) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

2) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"ADJUST THE SYSTEM VOLTS & AMPS" is displayed.

3) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

4) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"POWER SHARE IS OFF, TURN IT ON?" is displayed.

Note: If “TURN OFF TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION” is displayed, the MCA is set for temperature compensation. Disable temperature compensation and then return to this procedure.

5) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously. "ARE YOU SURE?" is displayed. Press and release the

FUNCTION SET YES (+) key.

6) Continue with the next procedure.

Setting the Power Share Initial Capacity Limit

1) From the previous procedure, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT

DOWN arrow key to display "PS INITIAL CAPACITY LIMIT = ##%".

2) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

3) Press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key to change this setting as required. Release the key when the desired value is displayed.

Note: Enter the percentage value of the total capacity of the New Power System that will initially feed the load. This value must be set to ensure that the current delivered by the New Power System is lower than the total load current from the existing and New Power Systems.

(Adjustable from 20% to 90%, factory set at 80%.)

Page 3-22 Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

4) With the desired value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET

ENTER key.

5) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

6) Continue with the next procedure.

Setting the Power Share Voltage Offset

1) From the previous procedure, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT

DOWN arrow key to display "PS VOLTAGE OFFSET = v.vV".

2) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

3) Press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key to change this setting as required. Release the key when the desired value is displayed.

Note: Enter the value that will be added to the float voltage to ensure the New

Power System will initially carry the load. This value must be higher than the sum of the voltage drop in the cables connecting the two systems in parallel and the output voltage regulation specific to the rectifiers of the

Existing Power System. If the sense leads are connected to the same sensing points as the Existing Power System, the Voltage Offset should take into consideration the output voltage regulation only.

(Adjustable from 0.1V to 1.0V, factory set at 0.1V.)

4) With the desired value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET

ENTER key.

5) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

6) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

Verifying the Operation of the Power Share Feature

After programming the “Power Share” feature, verify its operation as follows. a) In a Power Share application where the New Power System is taking all of the load and the rectifiers in the Existing Power System are all in the standby mode, use an external dry load bank of sufficient capacity to increase the load on the

New Power System over the “PS Initial Capacity Limit”.

1) Verify that the New Power System limits the total output of its (PCUs) rectifiers to the current equivalent to this programmed percentage.

2) Verify that the New Power System lowers its output voltage by the value of the programmed “PS Voltage Offset”.

3) Verify that the rectifiers in the Existing Power System take the additional load as the load increases pass the “PS Initial Capacity Limit”.

4) Further increase the load in order to exceed the total capacity of the rectifiers in the Existing Power System (or shut down some of the rectifiers in the

Existing Power System if the capacity of the external dry load bank is not sufficient). Verify that the New Power System starts taking the additional load as soon as the total capacity of the rectifiers in the Existing Power

System is exceeded.

Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures Page 3-23

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013 Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802

User Instructions

NLEB and 802 NL B b) In a Power Share application where the New Power System is taking only part of the load (operating continuously at the current level equivalent to the programmed “PS Initial Capacity Limit” percentage) and the rectifiers in the

Existing Power System are taking the rest of the load, use an external dry load bank of sufficient capacity to increase the load in order to exceed the total capacity of the rectifiers in the Existing Power System (or shut down some of the rectifiers in the Existing Power System if the capacity of the external dry load bank is not sufficient).

)

1) Verify that the New Power System starts taking the additional load as soon as the total capacity of the rectifiers in the Existing Power System is exceeded.

Page 3-24 Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MCA “ALTERNATE CURRENT LIMIT” FEATURE

Description

The MCA Alternate Current Limit feature provides the means to automatically change the current limit operation of power system’s rectifiers (PCUs) when an external event/condition occurs.

Operating Modes

Normal Current Limit Operation

When the signal connected to the “Alternate Current Limit Input” is inactive, the system’s

PCUs curren t limiting feature operates at the value based on the “PCU Current Limit” parameter setting.

Alternate Current Limit Operation

When the signal connected to the “Alternate Current Limit Input” is active, the system’s

PCUs current limiting feature operates a t the value based on the “Alternate Current Limit

Capacity” parameter setting.

Requirements and Conditions

The system must have an MCA I/O circuit card installed.

Binary input #4 must be connected to a signal that will indicate to the MCA to place the rect ifiers into the “Alternate Current Limit” mode.

Programming the MCA Alternate Current Limit Feature

When the Alternate Current Limit is first enabled, the “Alternate Current Limit Capacity” parameter defaults to a value of 100% of available capacity.

Note: The “Alternate Current Limit” feature is not compatible with the Power Share feature. If Power Share is programmed ON, then “Turn Off Power Share” is displayed in the Alternate Current Limit menu.

Note: The PCU current limit menu item setting is ignored when Alternate Current Limit is enabled AND the Alternate Current Limit Input is active. When this occurs, the message “ALT. LIMIT” is displayed in the PCU Current Limit menu.

Enabling Alternate Current Limit

1) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

2) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"ADJUST THE SYSTEM VOLTS & AMPS" is displayed.

3) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

4) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"ALT. LIMIT IS OFF, TURN IT ON?" is displayed.

5) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously. "ARE YOU SURE?" is displayed. Press and release the

FUNCTION SET YES (+) key.

Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures Page 3-25

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

6) Continue with the next procedure.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Setting the Alternate Current Limit Initial Capacity Limit

1) From the previous procedure, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT

DOWN arrow key to display "ALTERNATE CURRENT LIMIT = ##%".

2) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

3) Press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key to change this setting as required. Release the key when the desired value is displayed.

Note: Enter the percentage value of the total PCU output capacity at which the system will c urrent limit when the “Alternate Current Limit Input” becomes active.

(Adjustable from 10% to 110%, factory set at 100%.)

4) With the desired value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET

ENTER key.

5) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

6) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

Page 3-26 Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

CHAPTER 4

MCA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Adjustment Location and Identification ............................................................................ 4-2

Adjusting Float Output Voltage ........................................................................................ 4-3

Adjusting Test/Equalize Output Voltage .......................................................................... 4-4

Adjusting High Voltage Shutdown ................................................................................... 4-5

Adjusting Rectifier Current Limit ...................................................................................... 4-6

Adjusting System High Voltage Alarm 1 .......................................................................... 4-7

Adjusting System High Voltage Alarm 2 .......................................................................... 4-8

Adjusting System Battery On Discharge Alarm ............................................................... 4-9

Adjusting System Very Low Voltage Alarm ................................................................... 4-10

Adjusting Total Distribution Load Alarm ........................................................................ 4-11

Adjusting Distribution Group A Load Alarm ................................................................... 4-12

Adjusting Distribution Group B Load Alarm ................................................................... 4-13

Adjusting Battery Ambient High Temperature #1 Alarm (if Battery Charge Digital

Temperature Compensation Probe is installed) ............................................................ 4-14

Adjusting Battery Ambient High Temperature #2 Alarm (if Battery Charge Digital

Temperature Compensation Probe is installed) ............................................................ 4-15

Adjusting Battery Ambient Low Temperature #1 Alarm (if Battery Charge Digital

Temperature Compensation Probe is installed) ............................................................ 4-16

Adjusting Battery Ambient Low Temperature #2 Alarm (if Battery Charge Digital

Temperature Compensation Probe is installed) ............................................................ 4-17

Configuring Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Slope ....................... 4-18

Configuring Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Maximum

Voltage........................................................................................................................... 4-19

Configuring Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Minimum Voltage ..... 4-20

Configuring Degree Units Displayed ( F or C) ............................................................. 4-21

Configuring the System Date and Time ........................................................................ 4-22

Configuring MCA I/O Circuit Card Analog Input(s) ........................................................ 4-23

Configuring MCA I/O Circuit Card Analog Output(s) ..................................................... 4-25

Configuring MCA I/O Circuit Card Binary Input(s) ......................................................... 4-26

MCA Audible Alarm Cutoff Reset Time Period.............................................................. 4-27

MCA Rectifier Sequencing Feature ............................................................................... 4-27

Manually Initiated Timed Test/Equalize Feature ........................................................... 4-27

Automatic Test/Equalize Feature .................................................................................. 4-27

MCA Power Share Feature ........................................................................................... 4-27

Alarm Relay Test Feature .............................................................................................. 4-27

MCA “Alternate Current Limit” Feature .......................................................................... 4-27

Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments Page 4-1

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

ADJUSTMENT LOCATION AND IDENTIFICATION

All system alarm and control circuits intended for customer adjustment are accessible via the MCA Control Panel. Unless otherwise stated, these circuits have been factory set to the values listed in the System Application Guide. If readjustment is necessary, perform the appropriate adjustment procedure detailed below.

These adjustments can also be done remotely via the LMS (if furnished). To adjust the system via the optional LMS system, refer to the LMS User Instructions (Section 5847).

Section 5847 can be accessed via the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.

Refer to the illustrations in Chapter 1. System Overview for local adjustment controls locations.

Page 4-2 Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

ADJUSTING FLOAT OUTPUT VOLTAGE

1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.

2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"ADJUST THE SYSTEM VOLTS & AMPS" is displayed.

4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. "FLOAT SETPOINT = vv.vvV" is displayed.

5) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

6) Observe the value displayed. This is the float voltage setting for all Rectifiers. If the system is used with a battery charge digital temperature compensation probe, this value is the float voltage setting at 25°C. To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key. Release the key when the desired value is displayed.

Note: The float voltage value is prevented from being adjusted higher than 1V below the high voltage shutdown setting. When used with a Battery

Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Probe, float voltage is prevented from being adjusted higher than the Maximum Voltage with

Temperature Compensation setting, or lower than the Minimum Voltage with Temperature Compensation setting.

7) With the desired float voltage value being displayed, press and release the

FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

8) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

Note: The Rectifiers will assume the new value at their prevailing load current.

Note: The float voltage will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.

9) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments Page 4-3

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

ADJUSTING TEST/EQUALIZE OUTPUT VOLTAGE

1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.

2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"ADJUST THE SYSTEM VOLTS & AMPS" is displayed.

4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

5) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key to display

"TEST/EQUALIZE = vv.vvV".

6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

7) Observe the value displayed. This is the test/equalize voltage setting for all

Rectifiers. To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or

NO (-) key. Release the key when the desired value is displayed.

Note: The test/equalize voltage value is prevented from being adjusted higher than 1V below the high voltage shutdown setting. When used with a

Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Probe, test/equalize voltage is prevented from being adjusted higher than the Maximum

Voltage with Temperature Compensation setting, or lower than the

Minimum Voltage with Temperature Compensation setting.

8) With the desired test/equalize voltage value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

Note: The Rectifiers will assume the new value at their prevailing load current.

Note: The test/equalize voltage will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.

10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

Page 4-4 Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

ADJUSTING HIGH VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN

1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.

2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"ADJUST THE SYSTEM VOLTS & AMPS" is displayed.

4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"HI VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN = vv.vvV" is displayed.

6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

7) Observe the value displayed. This is the high voltage shutdown setting for all

Rectifiers. To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or

NO (-) key. Release the key when the desired value is displayed.

Note: The system will not allow a value higher than 59.5 to be entered. Also, the high voltage shutdown value is prevented from being adjusted lower than 1V above the higher of the float or test/equalize setting. When used with a Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Probe, high voltage shutdown is prevented from being adjusted lower than 1V above the Maximum Voltage with Temperature Compensation setting.

8) With the desired high voltage shutdown value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

Note: The high voltage shutdown value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.

10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments Page 4-5

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

ADJUSTING RECTIFIER CURRENT LIMIT

1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.

2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"ADJUST THE SYSTEM VOLTS & AMPS" is displayed.

4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"PCU CURRENT LIMIT = aaaaaA" or "PCU CURRENT LIMIT = aaaaaMAX" is displayed.

6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

7) Observe the value displayed. This is the system current limit setting. Each

Rectifier ’s current limit circuit will be automatically adjusted to ensure that system current does not exceed this value. To change this value, press and hold the

FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key. Release the key when the desired value is displayed.

Note: PCU current limit = aaaaaMAX indicates system current limit is set to the sum of the maximum current capacities of all Rectifier Modules installed in the system.

8) With the desired current limiting value being displayed, press and release the

FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

Note: The system current limit value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.

10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

Page 4-6 Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

ADJUSTING SYSTEM HIGH VOLTAGE ALARM 1

1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.

2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"ADJUST THE ALARM SETPOINTS" is displayed.

4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

5) "SYSTEM HI VOLTAGE #1 = vv.vvV" is displayed.

6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

7) Observe the value displayed. This is the high voltage alarm 1 setting. To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key.

Release the key when the desired value is displayed.

8) With the desired high voltage alarm 1 value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

Note: The high voltage alarm 1 value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.

10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments Page 4-7

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

ADJUSTING SYSTEM HIGH VOLTAGE ALARM 2

1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.

2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"ADJUST THE ALARM SETPOINTS" is displayed.

4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

5) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key to display

"SYSTEM HI VOLTAGE #2 = vv.vvV".

6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

7) Observe the value displayed. This is the high voltage alarm 2 setting. To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key.

Release the key when the desired value is displayed.

8) With the desired high voltage alarm 2 value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

Note: The high voltage alarm 2 value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.

10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

Page 4-8 Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

ADJUSTING SYSTEM BATTERY ON DISCHARGE ALARM

1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.

2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"ADJUST THE ALARM SETPOINTS" is displayed.

4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"BATTERY ON DISCHARGE = vv.vvV" is displayed.

6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

7) Observe the value displayed. This is the battery on discharge alarm setting. To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key.

Release the key when the desired value is displayed.

8) With the desired battery on discharge alarm value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

Note: The battery on discharge value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.

10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments Page 4-9

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

ADJUSTING SYSTEM VERY LOW VOLTAGE ALARM

1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.

2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"ADJUST THE ALARM SETPOINTS" is displayed.

4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"VERY LOW VOLTAGE = vv.vvV" is displayed.

6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

7) Observe the value displayed. This is the very low voltage alarm setting. To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key.

Release the key when the desired value is displayed.

8) With the desired very low voltage alarm value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

Note: The very low voltage alarm value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.

10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

Page 4-10 Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

ADJUSTING TOTAL DISTRIBUTION LOAD ALARM

1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.

2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"ADJUST THE ALARM SETPOINTS" is displayed.

4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"TOTAL DISTRIBUTION = aaaaaA" is displayed.

6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

7) Observe the value displayed. This is the system current alarm setting. To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key.

Release the key when the desired value is displayed.

8) With the desired system current alarm value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

Note: The system current alarm value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 1 0 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.

10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments Page 4-11

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

ADJUSTING DISTRIBUTION GROUP A LOAD ALARM

1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.

2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"ADJUST THE ALARM SETPOINTS" is displayed.

4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"DISTRIBUTION GROUP A = aaaaaA" is displayed.

6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

7) Observe the value displayed. This is the Group A Load Current alarm setting.

To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key.

Release the key when the desired value is displayed.

8) With the desired Group A Load Current alarm value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

Note: The Group A Load Current alarm value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.

10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

Page 4-12 Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

ADJUSTING DISTRIBUTION GROUP B LOAD ALARM

1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.

2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"ADJUST THE ALARM SETPOINTS" is displayed.

4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"DISTRIBUTION GROUP B = aaaaaA" is displayed.

6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

7) Observe the value displayed. This is the Group B Load Current alarm setting.

To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key.

Release the key when the desired value is displayed.

8) With the desired Group B Load Current alarm value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

Note: The Group B Load Current alarm value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.

10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments Page 4-13

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

ADJUSTING BATTERY AMBIENT HIGH TEMPERATURE #1

ALARM (IF BATTERY CHARGE DIGITAL TEMPERATURE

COMPENSATION PROBE IS INSTALLED)

1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.

2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"ADJUST THE ALARM SETPOINTS" is displayed.

4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"NO HIGH TEMPERATURE #1 ALARM” or “HIGH TEMPERATURE #1 = ttt C/F" is displayed.

6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

7) Observe the value displayed. This is the high temperature #1 alarm setting. To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key.

Release the key when the desired value is displayed.

8) With the desired high temperature #1 alarm value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

Note: The high temperature #1 alarm value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.

10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

Page 4-14 Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

ADJUSTING BATTERY AMBIENT HIGH TEMPERATURE #2

ALARM (IF BATTERY CHARGE DIGITAL TEMPERATURE

COMPENSATION PROBE IS INSTALLED)

1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.

2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"ADJUST THE ALARM SETPOINTS" is displayed.

4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"NO HIGH TEMPERATURE #2 ALARM” or “HIGH TEMPERATURE #2 = ttt C/F" is displayed.

6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

7) Observe the value displayed. This is the high temperature #2 alarm setting. To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key.

Release the key when the desired value is displayed.

8) With the desired high temperature #2 alarm value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

Note: The high temperature #2 alarm value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.

10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments Page 4-15

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

ADJUSTING BATTERY AMBIENT LOW TEMPERATURE #1

ALARM (IF BATTERY CHARGE DIGITAL TEMPERATURE

COMPENSATION PROBE IS INSTALLED)

1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.

2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"ADJUST THE ALARM SETPOINTS" is displayed.

4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"NO LOW TEMPERATURE #1 ALARM” or “LOW TEMPERATURE #1 = ttt C/F" is displayed.

6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

7) Observe the value displayed. This is the low temperature #1 alarm setting. To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key.

Release the key when the desired value is displayed.

8) With the desired low temperature #1 alarm value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

Note: The low temperature #1 alarm value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed withi n 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.

10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

Page 4-16 Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

ADJUSTING BATTERY AMBIENT LOW TEMPERATURE #2

ALARM (IF BATTERY CHARGE DIGITAL TEMPERATURE

COMPENSATION PROBE IS INSTALLED)

1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.

2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"ADJUST THE ALARM SETPOINTS" is displayed.

4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"NO LOW TEMPERATURE #2 ALARM” or “LOW TEMPERATURE #2 = ttt C/F" is displayed.

6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

7) Observe the value displayed. This is the low temperature #2 alarm setting. To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key.

Release the key when the desired value is displayed.

8) With the desired low temperature #2 alarm value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

Note: The low temperature #2 alarm value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.

10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments Page 4-17

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

CONFIGURING BATTERY CHARGE DIGITAL

TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION SLOPE

Note: The Temperature Compensation feature requires Power Share to be turned off.

1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.

2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"CHANGE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS" is displayed.

4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"NO TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION” or “TEMPERATURE SLOPE =

0.vvvV C/F" is displayed.

6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

7) Observe the value displayed. This is the Battery Charge Digital Temperature

Compensation slope setting. To change this value, press and hold the

FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key. Release the key when the desired value is displayed.

Note: Refer to Battery and Equipment Manufacturers’ recommendations or site requirements for the value. Note that this is the compensation for the entire battery string, not per battery cell.

8) With the desired slope value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION

SET ENTER key.

9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

Note: The slope value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.

10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

Page 4-18 Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

CONFIGURING BATTERY CHARGE DIGITAL

TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION MAXIMUM VOLTAGE

1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.

2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"CHANGE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS" is displayed.

4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"MAXIMUM COMPENSATION = vv.vvV" is displayed.

6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

7) Observe the value displayed. This is the Battery Charge Digital Temperature

Compensation maximum voltage setting. To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key. Release the key when the desired value is displayed.

Note: Refer to Battery and Equipment Manufacturers’ recommendations or site requirements for the value.

Note: Maximum Voltage with Temperature Compensation is prevented from being adjusted higher than 1.0V below the High Voltage Shutdown setting, or lower than the float voltage setting.

8) With the desired maximum voltage with temperature compensation value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

Note: The maximum voltage with temperature compensation value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET

YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.

10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments Page 4-19

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

CONFIGURING BATTERY CHARGE DIGITAL

TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION MINIMUM VOLTAGE

1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.

2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"CHANGE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS" is displayed.

4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"MINIMUM COMPENSATION = vv.vvV" is displayed.

6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

7) Observe the value displayed. This is the Battery Charge Digital Temperature

Compensation minimum voltage setting. To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key. Release the key when the desired value is displayed.

Note: Refer to Battery and Equipment Manufacturers’ recommendations or site requirements for the value.

8) With the desired minimum voltage with temperature compensation value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

Note: The minimum voltage with temperature compensation value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET

YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.

10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

Page 4-20 Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

CONFIGURING DEGREE UNITS DISPLAYED ( F OR C)

1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.

2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"CHANGE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS" is displayed.

4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"NOW DISPLAYING (C or F) SET TO (F or C)" is displayed.

6) To toggle the degree units being displayed, press and release the ALARM

CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

7) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

Note: The minimum voltage with temperature compensation value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET

YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.

8) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments Page 4-21

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

CONFIGURING THE SYSTEM DATE AND TIME

1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.

2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"CHANGE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS" is displayed.

4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"IT IS NOW hh:mm:ss dd-mon-yy" is displayed.

6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously. The day of the month is underlined.

7) Press FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys to change the day of month.

8) Press FUNCTION SET ENTER key. Month is underlined.

9) Press FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys to change the month.

10) Press FUNCTION SET ENTER key. Year is underlined.

11) Press FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys to change the year.

12) Press FUNCTION SET ENTER key. Hour is underlined.

13) Press FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys to change the hour.

14) Press FUNCTION SET ENTER key. Minutes is underlined.

15) Press FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys to change the minutes.

16) Press FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

Page 4-22 Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

CONFIGURING MCA I/O CIRCUIT CARD ANALOG INPUT(S)

1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.

2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"CHANGE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS" is displayed.

4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

5) CHANGE I/O BOARD PARAMETERS is displayed. Press and release the

FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

6) ANALOG INPUT B#-P# IS DISTRIBUTION or ANALOG INPUT B#-P# IS

AUXILIARY is displayed (B#-P# = Bay Number – MCA I/O Circuit Card Position

Number).

This setting determines if the monitored input appears in the MCA

DISTRIBUTION MEASUREMENT menus or in separate MCA AUXILIARY

MEASUREMENT menus.

To toggle the setting, press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION

SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

“ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

To select another analog input (if available), press the FUNCTION SELECT

DOWN arrow key.

7) When the last MCA I/O circuit card with an analog input is selected, press the

FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key to display ANALOG INPUT B#-P# 50mV

= aaaaA (B#-P# = Bay Number – MCA I/O Circuit Card Position Number).

This sets the scale factor for the analog input.

Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

Observe the value displayed. To change this value, press and hold the

FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key. Release the key when the desired value is displayed.

With the desired value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET

ENTER key.

“ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

To select another analog input (if available), press the FUNCTION SELECT

DOWN arrow key.

Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments Page 4-23

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013 Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802

User Instructions

NLEB and 802 NL B

8) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

)

Page 4-24 Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

CONFIGURING MCA I/O CIRCUIT CARD ANALOG OUTPUT(S)

1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.

2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"CHANGE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS" is displayed.

4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

5) CHANGE I/O BOARD PARAMETERS is displayed. Press and release the

FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

6) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

ANALOG OUTPUT B#-P# 50mV = aaaaA (B#-P# = Bay Number – MCA I/O

Circuit Card Position Number).

This sets the scale factor for the analog output.

Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

Observe the value displayed. To change this value, press and hold the

FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key. Release the key when the desired value is displayed.

With the desired value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET

ENTER key.

“ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

To select another analog output (if available), press the FUNCTION SELECT

DOWN arrow key.

7) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments Page 4-25

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

CONFIGURING MCA I/O CIRCUIT CARD BINARY INPUT(S)

1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.

2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"CHANGE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS" is displayed.

4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

5) CHANGE I/O BOARD PARAMETERS is displayed. Press and release the

FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

6) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

BINARY INPUT B#-P#-I# IS ALARM = CLOSED or BINARY INPUT B#-P#-I# IS

ALARM = OPEN is displayed (B#-P#-I# = Bay Number – MCA I/O Circuit Card

Position Number – Binary Input Number).

This setting determines the alarm state of the monitored binary input.

To toggle the setting press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION

SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

“ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

To select another binary input located on the card, press the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key. When the last binary input is selected, pressing the

FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key displays the next MCA I/O circuit card with binary inputs (if available).

7) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

Note: If a binary input alarms, the MCA displays a "Binary Input Customer Text

Message" in the I/O Board Alarm Detail Message. If you wish to change

the default message, refer to 'Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures' for an adjustment procedure.

Page 4-26 Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

MCA AUDIBLE ALARM CUTOFF RESET TIME PERIOD

Refer to Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures for an adjustment procedure.

MCA RECTIFIER SEQUENCING FEATURE

Refer to Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures for an adjustment procedure.

MANUALLY INITIATED TIMED TEST/EQUALIZE FEATURE

Refer to Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures for an adjustment procedure.

AUTOMATIC TEST/EQUALIZE FEATURE

Refer to Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures for an adjustment procedure.

MCA POWER SHARE FEATURE

Refer to Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures for an adjustment procedure.

ALARM RELAY TEST FEATURE

Refer to Setting and Testing MCA Customer Alarm Relays in "Chapter 5. Installing the

Rectifiers and Initially Starting the System" in the separate INSTALLATION

INSTRUCTIONS (Section 5876).

MCA “ALTERNATE CURRENT LIMIT” FEATURE

Refer to Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures for an adjustment procedure.

Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments Page 4-27

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Page 4-28 Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

CHAPTER 5

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Admonishments ............................................................................................................... 5-2

General Safety .......................................................................................................... 5-2

Voltages .................................................................................................................... 5-2

LMS Maintenance Procedures ........................................................................................ 5-2

System Maintenance Procedures ................................................................................... 5-3

Adding a Rectifier ............................................................................................................ 5-8

Chapter 5. System Maintenance Page 5-1

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

ADMONISHMENTS

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

General Safety

Danger: SERVICE PERSONNEL MUST FOLLOW APPROVED SAFETY

PROCEDURES.

Performing the following procedures may expose service personnel to hazards. These procedures should be performed by qualified service personnel familiar with the hazards associated with this type of equipment. These hazards may include shock, energy, and/or burns. To avoid these hazards: a) The tasks should be performed in the order indicated. b) Remove watches, rings, and other jewelry. c) Prior to contacting any uninsulated surface or termination, use a voltmeter to verify that no voltage or the expected voltage is present. d) Wear eye protection, and use recommended tools. e) Use insulated tools.

(To avoid danger to the installer or damage to the equipment, the tools used in this procedure should have insulated grips. All exposed metal shafts, extensions, handles, etc. should be completely insulated with a minimum of three half-lapped layers of electrical tape. Ensure that wrenches with more than one working end have only one end exposed.)

Voltages

AC Input Voltages

Danger: This system operates from AC voltage capable of producing fatal electrical shock.

DC Input/Output Voltages

Danger: This system produces DC Power and requires battery to be connected to it. Although the DC voltage is not hazardously high, the rectifier modules and/or battery can deliver large amounts of current. Exercise extreme caution not to inadvertently contact or have any tool inadvertently contact a battery terminal or exposed wire connected to a battery terminal.

NEVER allow a metal object, such as a tool, to contact more than one termination at a time, or to simultaneously contact a termination and a grounded object. Even a momentary short circuit can cause explosion and injury.

LMS MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

Refer to the LMS User Instructions (Section 5847) for LMS maintenance procedures.

Section 5847 can be accessed via the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.

Page 5-2 Chapter 5. System Maintenance

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

The maintenance procedures listed in Table 5-1 should be performed and recorded at the recommended interval to ensure continual system operation.

The procedures listed in Table 5-2 may be performed and recorded at the recommended interval to track system operation. Table 5-2 procedures ARE NOT necessary for continual system operation. They are recommended only to provide a service record for the system.

The tables reference specific chapters in these User Instructions (Section 5877) or the separate Installation Instructions (Section 5876) that help in performing these procedures.

PROCEDURE REFERENCED IN COMPLETED (√)

Check Ventilation Openings for Obstructions such as Dust,

Papers, Manuals, etc.

--

Inspect and Tighten All

Installer's Connections

Section 5876,

Chapter 4.

Making Electrical

Connections.

Note: This table may be reproduced as necessary to record and document system performance.

Table 5-1

Maintenance Procedures to be Performed at 6-Month Intervals

Chapter 5. System Maintenance Page 5-3

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

PROCEDURE

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802

User Instructions

NLEB and 802

REFERENCED IN VALUE

Measure and Record

System Float

(Output) Voltage and

Compare MCA

Display Voltage with

Reference Meter

Section 5877, Chapter 2.

Navigating the MCA,

(Line #133) to Place in

Float Mode, if required.

Record System Output Voltage as Shown on the MCA Display.

Record also Reference Meter Voltage

Connected to System Output Busbars.

Measure and Record

System Test/Equalize

(Output) Voltage and

Compare MCA

Display Voltage with

Reference Meter

Section 5877, Chapter 2.

Navigating the MCA,

(Line #133) to Place in

Test/Equalize Mode.

Record System Output Voltage as Shown on the MCA Display.

Record also Reference Meter Voltage

Connected to System Output Busbars.

Section 5877, Chapter 2.

Navigating the MCA,

(Line #133) to Return to Float Mode.

Measure and Record

Total System Output

Current

Measure and Record

Total Rectifier Output

Current

Record System Output Current as Shown on the MCA Display.

Section 5877, Chapter 2

Navigating the MCA,

(Line #125).

Note: This table may be reproduced as necessary to record and document system performance.

Table 5-2 (cont’d on next page)

Procedures that MAY be Performed at 12-Month

Intervals to Track System Operation

NL B )

Page 5-4 Chapter 5. System Maintenance

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

PROCEDURE REFERENCED IN

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Rectifier VALUE

Measure and Record

Output Current of Each

Individual Rectifier

Section 5877,

Chapter 2.

Navigating the MCA,

(Line #126).

Bay # (__),

Rectifier 1

Bay # (__),

Rectifier 2

Bay # (__),

Rectifier 3

Bay # (__),

Rectifier 4

Bay # (__),

Rectifier 5

Bay # (__),

Rectifier 6

Bay # (__),

Rectifier 7

Bay # (__),

Rectifier 8

Bay # (__),

Rectifier 9

Bay # (__),

Rectifier 10

Record Rectifier High

Voltage Shutdown Value

Record Rectifier Current

Limit Value

Section 5877,

Chapter 2.

Navigating the MCA,

(Line #219).

Section 5877,

Chapter 2.

Navigating the MCA,

(Line #221).

--

--

Note: This table may be reproduced as necessary to record and document system performance.

Table 52 (cont’d from previous page, cont'd on next page)

Procedures that MAY be Performed at 12-Month

Intervals to Track System Operation

Chapter 5. System Maintenance Page 5-5

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

PROCEDURE REFERENCED IN

Record System High

Voltage 1 Alarm Value or

Record and Check System

High Voltage 1 Alarm Value

Section 5877, Chapter 2.

Navigating the MCA,

(Line #226). or

Section 5876,

Chapter 5.

Installing the Rectifiers and Initially Starting the

Power System.

Record System High

Voltage 2 Alarm Value or

Record and Check System

High Voltage 2 Alarm Value

Section 5877, Chapter 2.

Navigating the MCA,

(Line #227). or

Section 5876,

Chapter 5.

Installing the Rectifiers and Initially Starting the

Power System.

Record System Battery On

Discharge Alarm Value or

Record and Check System

Battery On Discharge

Alarm Value

Section 5877, Chapter 2.

Navigating the MCA,

(Line #228). or

Section 5876,

Chapter 5.

Installing the Rectifiers and Initially Starting the

Power System.

VALUE

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Record System Very Low

Voltage Alarm Value or

Record and Check System

Very Low Voltage Alarm

Value

Section 5877, Chapter 2.

Navigating the MCA,

(Line #229). or

Section 5876,

Chapter 5.

Installing the Rectifiers and Initially Starting the

Power System.

Note: This table may be reproduced as necessary to record and document system performance.

Table 5-2 (cont'd from previous page, cont'd on next page)

Procedures that MAY be Performed at 12-Month

Intervals to Track System Operation

Page 5-6 Chapter 5. System Maintenance

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

PROCEDURE REFERENCED IN VALUE

Record System Total

Distribution Load Current

Alarm Value or

Record and Check Total

Distribution Load Current

Alarm Value

Record Distribution Group

A Load Current Alarm

Value or

Record and Check

Distribution Group A Load

Current Alarm Value

Section 5877, Chapter 2.

Navigating the MCA,

(Line #230). or

Section 5876,

Chapter 5.

Installing the Rectifiers and Initially Starting the

Power System.

Section 5877, Chapter 2.

Navigating the MCA,

(Line #231). or

Section 5876,

Chapter 5.

Installing the Rectifiers and Initially Starting the

Power System.

Record Distribution Group

B Load Current Alarm

Value or

Record and Check

Distribution Group B Load

Current Alarm Value

Section 5877, Chapter 2.

Navigating the MCA,

(Line #232). or

Section 5876,

Chapter 5.

Installing the Rectifiers and Initially Starting the

Power System.

Note: This table may be reproduced as necessary to record and document system performance.

Table 5-2 (cont'd from previous page, cont'd on next page)

Procedures that MAY be Performed at 12-Month

Intervals to Track System Operation

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Chapter 5. System Maintenance Page 5-7

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

ADDING A RECTIFIER

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

To increase system current capacity, an additional Rectifier can easily be installed in an existing bay that contains an empty Rectifier mounting position. Follow the procedure detailed below. A Rectifier may be installed in a live system.

The Rectifier weighs approximately 40 lbs.

Rectifiers can be inserted or removed with power applied (hot swappable).

Procedure

1) Remove the blank panel from the Rectifier mounting position. Save this panel.

The panel must be re-installed if a Rectifier is removed.

2) Ensure that the Standby/Operate switch on the Rectifier to be installed is in the

"standby" position.

Note: In the next step, a safety latch is present on the left-hand (as viewed from the front) side panel of each Rectifier. The latch is designed to prevent the

Rectifier from inadvertently being removed completely from the Bay once it has been installed. It should not be necessary to depress the safety latch release when installing the Rectifier.

3) Install the Rectifier into the bay by sliding it evenly into its mounting position.

Secure the Rectifier to the bay by tightening the captive fasteners on the

Rectifier.

4) Place the Standby/Operate switch on the Rectifier installed to the I "operate" position.

5) The MCA automatically adds the capacity of the new Rectifier to the current limit and displays the new current limit setting.

6) If the current limit setting is correct, go to step 10). If the current limit setting is not correct, press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET

ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.

7) Observe the value displayed. This is the system current limit setting. Reset this value to the new current limit setting. Each Rectifier ’s current limit circuit will be automatically adjusted to ensure that system current does not exceed this value.

To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) pushbutton. Release the pushbutton when the desired value is displayed.

8) With the desired current limiting value being displayed, press and release the

FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.

9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) pushbutton.

Note: The system current limit value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.

10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

11) Ensure that there are no local or remote alarms activated on the system.

Page 5-8 Chapter 5. System Maintenance

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

CHAPTER 6

SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR

CONTACT INFORMATION

Support contact information is provided on the inside of the back cover of this document.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Contact Information ......................................................................................................... 6-1

Admonishments ............................................................................................................... 6-2

General Safety .......................................................................................................... 6-2

Voltages .................................................................................................................... 6-2

Circuit Card Handling ................................................................................................ 6-3

LMS Troubleshooting Procedures ................................................................................... 6-3

Troubleshooting Information ............................................................................................ 6-4

General ..................................................................................................................... 6-4

Adjustments .............................................................................................................. 6-4

MCA Messages ......................................................................................................... 6-4

Rectifier Current Sharing Unbalance ........................................................................ 6-5

Rectifier Module Fault Symptoms and Troubleshooting ........................................... 6-6

Updating the Inventory after Changes to the System Have Been Made .................. 6-7

Replacement Information ................................................................................................ 6-8

Replacement Assemblies ......................................................................................... 6-8

Replacement Cables ................................................................................................. 6-8

Replacement Procedures ................................................................................................ 6-9

Rectifier Replacement ............................................................................................... 6-9

MCA Circuit Card Replacement .............................................................................. 6-11

Router Circuit Card Replacement ........................................................................... 6-15

Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Card Replacement........................................... 6-18

MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Card Replacement ........................................ 6-21

MCA I/O Circuit Card Replacement ........................................................................ 6-21

Alarm, Reference, and Control Fuse Replacement ................................................ 6-22

Rectifier Fan Replacement ..................................................................................... 6-25

Adding a Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Probe to a

Previously Operated System ......................................................................................... 6-26

Removing a Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Probe from a

Previously Operated System ......................................................................................... 6-27

Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair Page 6-1

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

ADMONISHMENTS

General Safety

Danger: SERVICE PERSONNEL MUST FOLLOW APPROVED SAFETY

PROCEDURES.

Performing the following procedures may expose service personnel to hazards. These procedures should be performed by qualified service personnel familiar with the hazards associated with this type of equipment. These hazards may include shock, energy, and/or burns. To avoid these hazards: a) The tasks should be performed in the order indicated. b) Remove watches, rings, and other jewelry. c) Prior to contacting any uninsulated surface or termination, use a voltmeter to verify that no voltage or the expected voltage is present. d) Wear eye protection, and use recommended tools. e) Use insulated tools.

(To avoid danger to the installer or damage to the equipment, the tools used in this procedure should have insulated grips. All exposed metal shafts, extensions, handles, etc. should be completely insulated with a minimum of three half-lapped layers of electrical tape. Ensure that wrenches with more than one working end have only one end exposed.)

Voltages

AC Input Voltages

Danger: This system operates from AC voltage capable of producing fatal electrical shock.

DC Input/Output Voltages

Danger: This system produces DC Power and requires battery to be connected to it. Although the DC voltage is not hazardously high, the rectifier Modules and/or battery can deliver large amounts of current. Exercise extreme caution not to inadvertently contact or have any tool inadvertently contact a battery terminal or exposed wire connected to a battery terminal.

NEVER allow a metal object, such as a tool, to contact more than one termination at a time, or to simultaneously contact a termination and a grounded object. Even a momentary short circuit can cause explosion and injury.

Caution: Performing the following procedures may interrupt power to the loads, if battery reserve is not sufficient.

Page 6-2 Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Circuit Card Handling

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Warning: Installation or removal of the circuit cards requires careful handling.

Before handling any circuit card, read and follow the instructions contained on the Static Warning Page located at the beginning of this manual.

DC input power should always be removed from a circuit card before inserting or removing a circuit card.

To avoid possibility of circuit card damage from static discharge, a static wrist strap grounded through a one megohm resistor should always be worn when handling the circuit cards.

LMS TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES

Refer to the LMS User Instructions (Section 5847) for LMS troubleshooting procedures.

Section 5847 can be accessed via the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.

Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair Page 6-3

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION

General

This system is designed for ease in troubleshooting and repair. The various indicators, as described in Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures, are designed to isolate a failure to a specific element. Once the faulty element has been identified, refer to the next sections, “Replacement Information” and "Replacement Procedures".

The procedures listed in Chapter 5. System Maintenance, can also be used by servicing personnel in identification and/or prevention of trouble symptoms in the system.

Adjustments

If the suspected cause of a trouble symptom is an out of adjustment condition, that particular adjustment setting should be checked or reset using the appropriate adjustment procedure detailed in Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments. If a failed

Rectifier or circuit card is suspected, the adjustment procedures can also be used to verify the setpoints as well as the operation of the Rectifier or circuit card.

MCA Messages

An MCA Menu Tree (Section 5886) is provided in the separate INSTALLATION MANUAL and the CD CARRIER MANUAL (it is also provided on the CD). Each line in the MCA

Menu Tree contains a number. This number is referenced in a chart provided in Chapter

2. Navigating the MCA. This chart provides a description of each line listed on the MCA

Menu Tree.

If the MCA displays an alarm message, find the line in the MCA Menu Tree showing this message. For an explanation of this alarm, locate the corresponding MCA Menu Tree

Line Number in the chart provided in Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA.

Note: If the MCA is replaced with an MCA previously used in another power system, the

MCA may reflect inventory items not in the current power system and may display alarms. In this case, update the inventory as detailed in this chapter. Also, if you remove an inventory item (a component) from the power system, you must update the inventory to clear alarms.

Note: If you remove a Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Probe, alarms are displayed. Manually set the Battery Charge Digital Temperature

Compensation feature to off as described in "Chapter 4. MCA System

Adjustments" to clear the alarms.

Page 6-4 Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Rectifier Current Sharing Unbalance

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

When multiple rectifiers are operating in parallel and the current sharing unbalance among them is greater than 3%, check if the communications cables are correctly connected.

If the current sharing unbalance still persists, following the verification suggested above, then replace the rectifier which has had its current sharing function disabled.

Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair Page 6-5

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Rectifier Module Fault Symptoms and Troubleshooting

The fault indicators that can be displayed by the rectifier are as follows: Power indicator

(green) off, Protection indicator (yellow) on, Protection indicator (yellow) flashing, Alarm indicator (red) on, and Alarm indicator (red) flashing. Refer to Table 6-1 for a list of possible causes and corrective actions.

Symptom Possible Cause(s) Suggested Action(s)

Power

Indicator

(Green) Off

No input voltage.

Input polarity reversed or input fuse blown.

Make sure there is input voltage.

Replace the fuse with a new one of the same capacity or reconnect the input power correctly.

Ensure that the AC input voltage is within the acceptable range.

AC input voltage outside the normal range.

PFC over-voltage. Replace the rectifier.

Protection

Indicator

(Yellow) On

Current sharing function is disabled.

Rectifier not inserted into the slot completely.

Replace the rectifier. nsert the rectifier again properly.

Rectifier over-temperature protection, which could be caused by:

1. Fan blocked.

2. Ventilation blocked (inlet or outlet).

1. Remove any object that may be blocking the fan.

2. Remove any object that may be blocking the inlet or outlet.

3. Ambient temperature too high or rectifier inlet too close to a heat source.

3. Lower the ambient temperature, relocate the heat source.

Protection

Indicator

(Yellow)

Flashing

Rectifier communication failure. Check the communication cables.

Alarm

Indicator

(Red) On

Rectifier over-voltage.

Remove the rectifier from the DC power system, restart the rectifier, and replace the rectifier if the overvoltage condition still persists.

Alarm

Indicator

(Red) Flashing

Fan not operating. Replace the rectifier.

Table 6-1

Rectifier Module Troubleshooting

Page 6-6 Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Updating the Inventory after Changes to the System Have Been Made

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

When an inventory item is removed from the system, an alarm will be reported until the following procedure is performed.

Example, if a Rectifier is removed from the system, the Rectifier will not be removed from the MCA's inventory until "VIEW THE SYSTEM INVENTORY" is entered and the

"UPDATE THE INVENTORY" operation is completed.

Procedure

1) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or

In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION

SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.

2) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"VIEW THE SYSTEM INVENTORY" is displayed.

3) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.

4) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until

"UPDATE THE INVENTORY" is displayed.

5) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.

6) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES

(+) key.

7) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.

Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair Page 6-7

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

REPLACEMENT INFORMATION

Replacement Assemblies

When a trouble symptom is localized to a faulty Rectifier or circuit card, that particular

Rectifier or circuit card should be replaced in its entirety. No attempt should be made to troubleshoot or repair individual components on any Rectifier or circuit card.

Refer to SAG582140000 (System Application Guide) for replacement part numbers. The

SAG can be accessed via the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.

Replacement Cables

Refer to SAG582140000 (System Application Guide) for replacement part numbers. The

SAG can be accessed via the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.

Page 6-8 Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Rectifier Replacement

Danger: Observe the instructions on top of the Rectifier as you remove it.

Note: If a Rectifier is removed without being replaced, perform the UPDATE

INVENTORY procedure found in this chapter to clear alarms.

The Rectifier weighs approximately 40 lbs.

Rectifiers can be inserted or removed with power applied (hot swappable).

Procedure

1) Observe the admonishments presented at the beginning of this chapter, and those encountered in this procedure.

2) Performing this procedure may activate external alarms. Do one of the following.

If possible, disable these alarms. If these alarms cannot be easily disabled, notify the appropriate personnel to disregard any future alarms associated with this system.

3) On the Rectifier to be removed, place the Standby/Operate switch to the

"standby" position.

Note: In the next step, a safety latch is present on the left-hand (as viewed from the front) side panel of each Rectifier. The latch is designed to prevent the

Rectifier from inadvertently being removed completely from the Bay once it has been installed. It should not be necessary to depress the safety latch release when installing the Rectifier.

4) Loosen the captive fasteners on the front of the Rectifier to be removed. Use the handle provided on the front of the Rectifier, and pull the Rectifier out until it is stopped by a safety latch located on the left-hand side panel of the Rectifier.

Refer to Figure 6-1 for latch and release location. Depress and hold the latch

release, and remove the Rectifier from the shelf. Support the bottom of the

Rectifier as you pull it out. Observe the instructions on top of the Rectifier as

you remove it.

5) Ensure that the Standby/Operate switch on the replacement Rectifier is in the

"standby" position.

6) Slide the replacement Rectifier evenly into its mounting position. It should not be necessary to depress the safety latch release. Secure the Rectifier to the bay by tightening the captive fasteners located on the Rectifier.

7) Place the Standby/Operate switch on this Rectifier to the I "operate" position.

8) Enable the external alarms, or notify appropriate personnel that this procedure is finished.

9) Ensure that there are no local or remote alarms active on the system.

Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair Page 6-9

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

SAFETY LATCH

LATCH RELEASE

OBSERVE

INSTRUCTIONS

ON TOP OF PCU AS

PCU IS REMOVED

MUST HAVE CONTROL

OF PCU WHEN LINE

REACHES EDGE OF BAY

MUST HAVE CONTROL

OF PCU WHEN LINE

REACHES EDGE OF BAY

MUST HAVE CONTROL OF

PCU WHEN LINE REACHES

FRONT OF ADJACENT PCU

GRASP SIDE IN THIS

AREA TO CARRY

OR REMOVE PCU.

CENTER OF

GRAVITY AREA

ATTENTION:

SPRING LATCH ON LEFT

SIDE OF PCU MUST BE

DEPRESSED TO REMOVE

THE PCU FROM THE BAY.

CAUTION:

WEIGHT 40 LBS (18.1kG)

GRASP SIDE IN THIS

AREA TO CARRY

OR REMOVE PCU.

Figure 6-1

208V and 480V Rectifiers

Page 6-10 Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA Circuit Card Replacement

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

The MCA circuit card is installed in the Primary Power/Distribution Bay and Primary

Power Only Bay. Router circuit cards are installed in the Secondary Power/Distribution

Bays, Secondary Power Only Bays, and Distribution Only Bays.

Note: Refer to Figure 6-2 as this procedure is performed.

Procedure

1) Observe the admonishments presented at the beginning of this chapter, and those encountered in this procedure.

2) Performing this procedure may activate external alarms. Do one of the following.

If possible, disable these alarms. If these alarms cannot be easily disabled, notify the appropriate personnel to disregard any future alarms associated with this system.

3) Replacing the MCA circuit card WILL result in all MCA settings being returned to

their factory default values. In Table 6-2 and Table 6-3, either manually record

all existing MCA settings or record the required settings for your site from your company's DC Plant Set Points specifications (standards).

Note: The MCA configuration can be saved by downloading the configuration using the LMS Monitoring System (if installed).

Refer to the MCA Menu Tree (Section 5886) and Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA

to manually record MCA settings. The MCA Menu Tree is provided in the separate INSTALLATION MANUAL and the CD CARRIER MANUAL (it is also provided on the CD).

4) Open the bay's front door to access the MCA circuit card mounting position.

Warning: Damage to the MCA circuit card may result if the next step is not followed.

5) Connect an approved grounding strap to your wrist. Attach the other end to a suitable ground.

6) Remove fuse F3 that supplies input power to the MCA circuit card. Refer to

Figure 6-7 for location.

7) With an external voltmeter, verify plant voltage is correct (MCA is powered down at this point).

8) Remove any network cables from the circuit card, noting their locations for reassembly.

9) Remove the alarm cable connector TB1 from the circuit card. Note that terminal block TB1 consists of two pieces snapped together. The two pieces can be separated by first loosening the two screws; then gently pulling the one half from the other.

10) Loosen the circuit card retaining screw.

11) Remove the circuit card.

12) Set the switches of S1 on the replacement circuit card to match the settings of the removed circuit card.

13) Slide the replacement circuit card into its mounting location, ensuring the rear edge connector is firmly seated.

14) Secure the circuit card by tightening the circuit card retaining screw .

Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair Page 6-11

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

15) Replace fuse F3 which supplies input power to the MCA circuit card. Refer to

Figure 6-7 for location.

16) The MCA goes through an initialization routine (as detailed in Chapter 5.

Installing the Rectifiers and Initially Starting the System of the INSTALLATION

INSTRUCTIONS [Section 5877]). During this initialization routine, check (and if required change) the MCA settings for your Site. In lieu of manually entering new MCA settings, if the old MCA configuration was downloaded via the LMS; upload the configuration. Refer to the LMS User Instructions for a procedure.

17) Remove the grounding wrist strap.

18) Close the bay's front door.

19) Enable the external alarms, or notify appropriate personnel that this procedure is finished.

20) Ensure that there are no local or remote alarms active on the system.

Page 6-12 Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Setting

Float Output Voltage

Test/Equalize Output Voltage

High Voltage Shutdown

Rectifier Current Limit

High Voltage #1 Alarm

High Voltage #2 Alarm

Battery On Discharge Alarm

Very Low Voltage Alarm

Total Distribution Load Alarm

Distribution Group A Load

Alarm

Distribution Group B Load

Alarm

High Battery Ambient

Temperature #1 Alarm

High Battery Ambient

Temperature #2 Alarm

Low Battery Ambient

Temperature #1 Alarm

Low Battery Ambient

Temperature #2 Alarm

Digital Temperature

Compensation (Slope)

Digital Temperature

Compensation (Maximum

Compensation)

Digital Temperature

Compensation (Minimum

Compensation)

Factory

Default Setting

52.00V

52.00V

57.50V

100% of Rated

Full Load

55.50V

56.50V

51.00V

47.00V

2000A

2000A

2000A

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

(0V/ C)

56.50V

50.00V

Table 6-2

MCA Basic Settings

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Required

Site Setting

Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair Page 6-13

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Setting

Factory

Default Setting

Required

Site Setting

MCA Audible Alarm

Silent Time Period

Manually Initiated Timed

Test/Equalize Feature

Automatic

Test/Equalize Feature

Alarm Relay

Test Feature

MCA Customer

Alarm Relays

15 Minutes

1 Hour

Disabled

45 Seconds

--

Table 6-3

MCA Advanced Setting

Program as required.

Page 6-14 Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Router Circuit Card Replacement

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

The MCA circuit card is installed in the Primary Power/Distribution Bay and Primary

Power Only Bay. Router circuit cards are installed in the Secondary Power/Distribution

Bays, Secondary Power Only Bays, and Distribution Only Bays.

Note: Refer to Figure 6-2 and Figure 6-3 as this procedure is performed.

Procedure

1) Observe the admonishments presented at the beginning of this chapter, and those encountered in this procedure.

2) Performing this procedure may activate external alarms. Do one of the following.

If possible, disable these alarms. If these alarms cannot be easily disabled, notify the appropriate personnel to disregard any future alarms associated with this system.

3) Open the bay's front door to access the Router circuit card mounting position.

Warning: Damage to the Router circuit card may result if the next step is not followed.

4) Connect an approved grounding strap to your wrist. Attach the other end to a suitable ground.

5) Remove the fuse which supplies input power to the Router circuit card. Refer to

Figure 6-7 and Figure 6-8 for location.

6) Remove any network cables from the circuit card, noting their locations for reassembly.

7) Loosen the circuit card retaining screw.

8) Remove the circuit card.

9) Slide the replacement circuit card into its mounting location, ensuring the rear edge connector is firmly seated.

10) Secure the circuit card by tightening the circuit card retaining screw.

11) Replace the fuse which supplies input power to the Router circuit card. Refer to

Figure 6-7 and Figure 6-8 for location.

12) Remove the grounding wrist strap.

13) Close the bay's front door.

14) Enable the external alarms, or notify appropriate personnel that this procedure is finished.

15) Ensure that there are no local or remote alarms active on the system.

Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair Page 6-15

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Power/Distribution Bay

(Power Only Bay Similar)

MCA/Router

Circuit Card

Figure 6-2

Power/Distribution Bay

MCA/Router Circuit Card Replacement

(Power Only Bay Similar)

Page 6-16 Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Router

Circuit Card

Front door removed in illustration for clarity.

Distribution Bays

Figure 6-3

Distribution Only Bay

MCA/Router Circuit Card Replacement

Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair Page 6-17

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Card Replacement

Two Distribution Bus Monitoring circuit cards are installed in each Power/Distribution Bay.

Four Distribution Bus Monitoring circuit cards are installed in each Distribution Only Bay.

Note: Refer to Figure 6-4 and Figure 6-5 as this procedure is performed.

Procedure

1) Observe the admonishments presented at the beginning of this chapter, and those encountered in this procedure.

2) Performing this procedure may activate external alarms. Do one of the following.

If possible, disable these alarms. If these alarms cannot be easily disabled, notify the appropriate personnel to disregard any future alarms associated with this system.

3) Open the bay's front door to access the Distribution Bus Monitoring circuit card mounting positions.

Warning: Damage to the Distribution Bus Monitoring circuit card may result if the next step is not followed.

4) Connect an approved grounding strap to your wrist. Attach the other end to a suitable ground.

5) Remove the fuse that supplies input power to the Distribution Bus Monitoring

circuit card. Refer to Figure 6-7 and Figure 6-8 for location.

6) Open the hinged panel to access to Distribution Bus Monitoring circuit card.

7) Remove the circuit card.

8) Slide the replacement circuit card into its mounting location, ensuring the rear edge connector is firmly seated.

9) Close the hinged panel.

10) Replace the fuse which supplies input power to the Distribution Bus Monitoring

circuit card. Refer to Figure 6-7 and Figure 6-8 for location.

11) Remove the grounding wrist strap.

12) Close the bay's front door.

13) Enable the external alarms, or notify appropriate personnel that this procedure is finished.

14) Ensure that there are no local or remote alarms active on the system.

Page 6-18 Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Power/Distribution Bays

Distribution Bus

Monitoring

Circuit Card

Figure 6-4

Power/Distribution Bay

Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Card Replacement

Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair Page 6-19

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Distribution Bays

Front Door Removed in

Illustration for Clarity

Distribution

Bus Monitoring

Circuit Card

Figure 6-5

Distribution Only Bay

Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Card Replacement

Page 6-20 Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Card Replacement

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Refer to the Installation Procedure detailed in the Installation Instructions (Section 5876).

MCA I/O Circuit Card Replacement

Refer to the Installation Procedure detailed in the Installation Instructions (Section 5876).

Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair Page 6-21

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Alarm, Reference, and Control Fuse Replacement

If an alarm, reference, or control fuse opens; replace with the same type and rating, or

equivalent. Refer to SAG582140000 for fuse replacement part numbers. Refer to Figure

6-7 and Figure 6-8 for alarm, reference, and control fuse locations.

Rectifier: The input of each Rectifier contains double pole/neutral fusing. This fusing is not customer replaceable. If a fuse opens, replace the entire Rectifier. An open fuse causes the Rectifiers Rectifier fail alarm circuit to activate. The input fuses have higher amperage ratings than the recommended external branch circuit protection.

Distribution Fuses: If a distribution fuse opens, the associated alarm-type fuse opens to activate the fuse alarm circuit. Replace the distribution fuse before replacing the alarm-type fuse.

Safety Fuse Covers: Safety fuse covers are provided for all alarm-type fuses installed in the system. These covers snap onto the fuses and provide protection from exposed electrical terminations when a fuse opens. Insure that the safety fuse cover is installed

after replacing a fuse. Refer to Figure 6-6 for installation details. Note that there are

different types of safety fuse covers for the different brand alarm-type fuses.

Safety Fuse Cover

P/N 248898600

(SAN-O SAX-1)

Safety Fuse Cover

P/N 248898700

(BUSSMANN GMT-X)

Figure 6-6

Installation of Safety Fuse Covers

Safety Fuse Cover

P/N 102774

(BUSSMANN GMT-Y)

Page 6-22 Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

LMS / DIST / MCA

F1 F2 F3

3A 3A 3A

Figure 6-7

Power/Distribution Bay Fuse Locations

(Power Only Bay Similar)

Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair Page 6-23

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Front Door Removed in

Illustration for Clarity

Distribution Bays

F1 (3A) Router

F2 (3A) Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Card (Bus #1 and #2)

F3 (3A) Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Card (Bus #3 and #4)

Figure 6-8

Distribution Only Bay Fuse Locations

Page 6-24 Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

Rectifier Fan Replacement

The rectifier fans are not field-replaceable. If a fan fails, replace the rectifier as described in this chapter.

Caution: In a system with NO redundant Rectifier Module, battery must have sufficient reserve to power the load(s) while the Rectifier Module is removed.

Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair Page 6-25

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

ADDING A BATTERY CHARGE DIGITAL TEMPERATURE

COMPENSATION PROBE TO A PREVIOUSLY OPERATED

SYSTEM

This procedure details the steps to add a Battery Charge Digital Temperature

Compensation Probe to a system that has been previously started, configured, and checked.

Procedure

1) Refer to the separate Installation Manual , “Chapter 3. Making Electrical

Connections ”, and mount the Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation

Probe near the batteries.

2) Refer to the separate Installation Manual , “Chapter 3. Making Electrical

Connections ”, and connect the Battery Charge Digital Temperature

Compensation Probe to the system. The MCA automatically detects the probe and adds it to the inventory without any alarms. The default slope setting is NO

TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION.

3) Refer to “Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments” of these instructions, and set the following digital battery charge temperature compensation parameters: SLOPE,

MAXIMUM COMPENSATION, and MINIMUM COMPENSATION.

4) Refer to “Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments” of these instructions, and set the following alarm parameters: HIGH TEMPERATURE #1 ALARM, HIGH

TEMPERATURE #2 ALARM, LOW TEMPERATURE #1 ALARM, and LOW

TEMPERATURE #2 ALARM.

5) Verify that battery charge temperature compensation has begun by comparing the SYSTEM voltage reading versus the FLOAT setting. Depending on the battery ambient temperature, the SYSTEM voltage should be higher or lower than the FLOAT setting by the amount of slope V/ºC (note that SYSTEM voltage will also vary from the FLOAT setpoint depending on the load).

Note: At 25ºC, the battery charge temperature compensated SYSTEM voltage equals the FLOAT voltage setting.

Note: If the probe is disconnected or fails, a major alarm (local and extended) activates and the system returns to the FLOAT voltage setting.

Page 6-26 Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

REMOVING A BATTERY CHARGE DIGITAL TEMPERATURE

COMPENSATION PROBE FROM A PREVIOUSLY OPERATED

SYSTEM

This procedure details the steps to remove a Battery Charge Digital Temperature

Compensation Probe from a system that has been previously started, configured, and checked.

Procedure

1) In the Configure Menu, set the SLOPE = 0.vvvV C/F to NO TEMPERATURE

COMPENSATION. Temperature Compensation stops and the System returns to the FLOAT voltage setting.

2) Remove the probe. The Major Alarm activates. Update inventory to clear this alarm, as described in this chapter.

Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair Page 6-27

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

Section 5877

Issue AQ, January 15, 2013

User Instructions

Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )

This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy

Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.

NetPerform™ Optimization Services

At Emerson Network Power, we understand the importance of reliable equipment – it’s critical to both your business and your bottom line. That is why we offer a wide array of services to meet all of your network infrastructure needs.

Technical Support

Email [email protected]

[email protected]

1.800.800.5260

Answers technical product and system questions; determines status of warranties and contractual agreements for repair.

Phone

Services - Design, Deployment & Optimization

Email [email protected]

Phone 1.800.800.1280, option 7

FreedomCare Secure.EmersonNetworkPower.com

Spare Parts

Provides quotes and bid responses, order placement and scheduling for design, and deployment and optimization services.

Download service & maintenance reports online.

Email

Phone

[email protected]

[email protected]

1.800.800.1280, option 5

Pricing and PO processing of spare parts, including but not limited to breakers, cables, fuses, rectifier fans, misc. breaker and fuse panels, enclosure fans, doors & switches, etc.

DC Power Depot Repair

Email

Phone

[email protected] Creates and processes RMAs, determines

1.800.800.1280, option 6 lead times and pricing, provides repair shipping information and status.

DC Power Product Training

Email

Phone

[email protected] Requests for quotes, order placement and

1.800.800.1280, option 8 scheduling.

For More Information

To learn more about service offerings from Emerson Network Power, please contact your sales representative, call 1-800-800-1280 option 7, email [email protected]

or visit www.EmersonNetworkPower.com/EnergySystems .

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents